Alvarion BreezeMAX 3500 System Manual

Add to My manuals
311 Pages

advertisement

Alvarion BreezeMAX 3500 System Manual | Manualzz
BreezeMAX™ 3500
System Manual
S/W Version 1.5
April 2005
P/N 214017
Legal Rights
Legal Rights
© Copyright 2005 Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved.
The material contained herein is proprietary, privileged, and confidential and
owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors. No disclosure thereof shall be
made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and
descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication
shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically
incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
Trade Names
Alvarion®, BreezeCOM®, WALKair®, WALKnet®, BreezeNET®, BreezeACCESS®,
BreezeMANAGE™, BreezeLINK®, BreezeCCONFIG™, BreezeMAX™, AlvariSTAR™,
MGW™, eMGW™, WAVEXpress™, MicroXpress™, WAVEXchange™, WAVEView™,
GSM Network in a Box and TurboWAVE™ and/or other products and/or services
referenced here in are either registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks
of Alvarion Ltd.
All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Alvarion Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of
this manual or equipment supplied with it.
Warranties and Disclaimers
All Alvarion Ltd. (“Alvarion”) products purchased from Alvarion or through any of
Alvarion’s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product
liability terms and conditions.
Exclusive Warranty
(a) Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible
media on which any software is installed, under normal use and conditions, will
be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
fourteen (14) months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser
(the “Warranty Period”). Alvarion will, at its sole option and as Purchaser’s sole
remedy, repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion’
standard R&R procedure.
(b) With respect to the Firmware, Alvarion warrants the correct functionality
according to the attached documentation, for a period of fourteen (14) month
from invoice date (the "Warranty Period")". During the Warranty Period, Alvarion
may release to its Customers firmware updates, which include additional
BreezeMAX System Manual
iii
Legal Rights
performance improvements and/or bug fixes, upon availability (the “Warranty”).
Bug fixes, temporary patches and/or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware
updates.
Additional hardware, if required, to install or use Firmware updates must be
purchased by the Customer. Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two
(2) most recent Software major releases.
ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING
AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT
DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER’S OR ANY THIRD
PERSON'S MISUSE, NEGLIGENCE, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER
TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE
BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE,
LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD.
Disclaimer
(a) The Software is sold on an "AS IS" basis. Alvarion, its affiliates or its licensors
MAKE NO WARRANTIES, WHATSOEVER, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING
DOCUMENTATION. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE.
UNITS OF PRODUCT (INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE) DELIVERED TO
PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ARE NOT
DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN
APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE, MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF
PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE
PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE (“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). HIGH
RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, USE AS PART OF
ON LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING
FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR
FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR
TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR
OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL
HAZARD. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
(b) PURCHASER’S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS
WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE
PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE, AT ALVARION’S OPTION. TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET
FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EITHER IN FACT OR BY
OPERATION OF LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES, TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
BreezeMAX System Manual
iv
Legal Rights
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION, NON INFRINGEMENT, AND
ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED. ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED. ALVARION’ WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER,
AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES. ALVARION NEITHER
ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY
OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION,
MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS.
Limitation of Liability
(a) ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY, FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF
BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER ARISING UNDER
BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY
OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR
OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
(b) TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS
EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE
PRODUCT BY PURCHASER, NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR
DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY (EXCEPT IN THE
CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY’S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS).
Radio Frequency Interference Statement
The Subscriber Unit equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to ETSI EN 301 489-1 rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a residential environment notwithstanding
use in commercial, business and industrial environments. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications.
The Base Station and Micro Base Station equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to ETSI
EN 301 489-1 rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in commercial,
business and industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
BreezeMAX System Manual
v
Legal Rights
cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at the user’s own expense.
R&TTE Compliance Statement
This equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3
of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
Safety Considerations - General
For the following safety considerations, “Instrument” means the BreezeMAX units’
components and their cables.
Grounding
Base Station chassis, Micro Base Station and outdoor units are required to be
bonded to protective grounding using the bonding stud or screw provided with
each unit.
The Micro Base Station shall be bonded to earth at final installation.
Safety Considerations – DC Powered Equipment
CAUTION – Modular Base Station
ATTENTION – Station de Base Modulaire
Risk of electric shock and energy hazard.
Disconnecting one Power Interface Unit (PIU)
disconnects only one PIU module. To isolate the
Modular Base Station completely, disconnect
both PIUs.
Risque de décharge électrique et
d'electrocution.
La déconnection d'un seul module
d'alimentation (PIU) n'isole pas complètement la
Station de Base Modulaire. Pour cela, il faut
impérativement débrancher les deux modules
d'alimentation (PIU).
Restricted Access Area: The DC powered equipment should only be installed in
a Restricted Access Area.
Installation Codes: The equipment must be installed according to the latest
edition of the country national electrical codes. For North America, equipment
must be installed in accordance with the US National Electrical Code and the
Canadian Electrical Code.
Overcurrent Protection: A readily accessible Listed branch circuit overcurrent
protective device, rated 40A for the modular Base Station or 20A for the Micro
Base Station, must be incorporated in the building wiring.
CAUTION: This equipment is designed to permit connection between the earthed
conductor of the DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor at the
equipment. See installation instructions.
The equipment must be connected directly to the DC Supply System
grounding electrode conductor.
BreezeMAX System Manual
vi
Legal Rights
All equipment in the immediate vicinity must be grounded in the same way,
and not be grounded elsewhere.
The DC supply system is to be local, i.e. within the same premises as the
equipment.
There shall be no disconnect device between the grounded circuit conductor
of the DC source (return) and the point of connection of the grounding
electrode conductor.
Lithium Battery
The battery on the NPU card and in the Micro Base Station is not intended for
replacement.
Caution
To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to
do so.
Line Voltage
Before connecting this instrument to the power line, make sure that the voltage of
the power source matches the requirements of the instrument.
Radio
The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation. To avoid
possible harmful exposure to this energy, do not stand or work for extended
periods of time in front of its antenna. The long-term characteristics or the
possible physiological effects of radio frequency electromagnetic fields have not
been yet fully investigated.
Outdoor Units and Antennas Installation and Grounding
Ensure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly
installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure
that the installation of the outdoor unit, antenna and cables is performed in
accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes. Even
where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and
national codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the
antenna mast (when using external antenna) are grounded and suitable lightning
protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and
static charges. In any event, Alvarion is not liable for any injury, damage or
regulation violations associated with or caused by installation, grounding or
lightning protection.
BreezeMAX System Manual
vii
Important Notice
Important Notice
This user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:
This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such
information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting authorized users of
the respective Alvarion products.
No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed to any
person or firm or reproduced by any means, electronic and mechanical,
without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only.
The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without
notice.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The
software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that
license.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are
fictitious unless otherwise noted.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and
descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this
publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless
specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does
not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein.
Any changes or modifications of equipment, including opening of the
equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd. will void equipment
warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for. It could also void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual, is
manufactured and warranted by third parties. All such equipment must be
installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by such
manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or
the manufacturers. Non compliance with such instructions may result in serious
damage and/or bodily harm and/or void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment and/or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer.
BreezeMAX System Manual
viii
About This Manual
This manual describes the BreezeMAX 3500 (“BreezeMAX”) Broadband Wireless
Access System Release 1.5 and details how to install, operate and manage the
system components.
This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing, setting and
operating the BreezeMAX system, and for system administrators responsible for
managing the system.
This manual contains the following chapters and appendices:
Chapter 1 – System description: Describes the BreezeMAX system and its
components.
Chapter 2 – Installation: Describes how to install the system components.
Chapter 3 – Commissioning: Describes how to configure basic parameters,
align the Subscriber Unit (SU) antenna and validate unit operation.
Chapter 4 – Operation and Administration: Describes how to use the
Monitor application for configuring parameters, checking system status and
monitoring performance.
Appendix A – Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor Cable: Provides details on
preparation of the indoor to outdoor Ethernet cable.
Appendix B – Using the SU Installer Program: Describes how to access and
use the SU Installer Program.
Appendix C – Software Upgrade: Describes how to load new software files
using TFTP, and how to switch to a new software version in BreezeMAX units.
NOTE
This guide covers the installation, commissioning and administration of BreezeMAX Base Station
equipment (modular Base station and Micro Base Station) and of the CPE with a CPE-IDU-1D
indoor unit (Basic IDU). For details on installation, commissioning and administration of other types
of indoor units (Gateway IDU), refer to the manual for the applicable equipment.
About This Manual
Appendix D – Traps and Alarms: Describes the BreezeMAX Traps and
Alarms.
Appendix E – Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways:
Describes the principles of defining Service Profiles for 3rd party generic
(non-DRAP-based) VoIP devices.
BreezeMAX System Manual
x
Contents
Chapter 1 - System Description ...............................................................1
1.1 Introducing BreezeMAX ............................................................................................................. 2
1.2 Subscriber Units ......................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Voice and Networking Gateways .............................................................................................. 6
1.4 Base Station Equipment ............................................................................................................ 8
1.5 Networking Equipment ............................................................................................................ 14
1.6 Management Systems .............................................................................................................. 15
1.7 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 17
Chapter 2 - Installation ..........................................................................31
2.1 Installing the ODU..................................................................................................................... 32
2.2 Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment.................................................................... 43
2.3 Installing the Micro Base Station Equipment ........................................................................ 60
2.4 Installing the CPE-IDU-1D Indoor Unit.................................................................................... 65
Chapter 3 - Commissioning ....................................................................69
3.1 Base Station and Micro Base Station Commissioning......................................................... 70
3.2 SU Commissioning................................................................................................................... 77
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration .............................................83
4.1 BreezeMAX System Management ........................................................................................... 84
4.2 The Monitor Program ............................................................................................................... 85
4.3 The Micro Base Station’s Main Menu ..................................................................................... 88
Contents
4.4 Micro Base Station Menu .........................................................................................................89
4.5 The NPU’s Main Menu...............................................................................................................95
4.6 Base Station Menu ....................................................................................................................97
4.7 NPU Menu ................................................................................................................................102
4.8 AU Menu...................................................................................................................................115
4.9 SU Menu ...................................................................................................................................132
4.10 Services Menu .........................................................................................................................150
4.11 NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters Summary ...................................................................177
Appendix A - Preparing the SU IDU-ODU Cable ................................... 191
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program ........................ 195
B.1 The SU Installer Monitor Program .........................................................................................196
B.2 Using the Monitor Program....................................................................................................197
B.3 The Main Menu ........................................................................................................................199
B.4 Unit Control Menu ...................................................................................................................201
B.5 Registration Parameters Menu ..............................................................................................210
B.6 Base Station ID Parameters Menu.........................................................................................212
B.7 Radio Parameters Menu .........................................................................................................215
B.8 Performance Monitoring Menu ..............................................................................................217
B.9 Multirate and ATPC Parameters Menu ..................................................................................221
B.10 SU Parameters Summary .......................................................................................................223
Appendix C - Software Upgrade........................................................... 225
C.1 Before you Start ......................................................................................................................226
C.2 File Loading Procedure ..........................................................................................................227
C.3 Completing the Software Upgrade (Switching Versions) ...................................................228
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms ........................................................... 229
BreezeMAX System Manual
xii
Contents
D.1 Traps and Alarms Structure .................................................................................................. 230
D.2 Traps and Alarms Sources .................................................................................................... 231
D.3 Traps and Alarms Severities ................................................................................................. 232
D.4 Trap/Alarm Categories ........................................................................................................... 233
D.5 BreezeMAX Traps ................................................................................................................... 234
D.6 Active Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 261
Appendix E - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways ...267
E.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 268
E.2 1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 Service Profile ............................................................................ 270
E.3 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729 Service Profile..................................................................... 272
E.4 1 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 Service Profile ............................................................................ 274
E.5 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711 Service Profile..................................................................... 276
BreezeMAX System Manual
xiii
Figures
Figure 1-1: BreezeMAX System Architecture ............................................................................................... 4
Figure 2-2: ODU Pole Installation Using Special Brackets ......................................................................... 37
Figure 2-3: ODU Pole Installation Using Metal Bands................................................................................ 38
Figure 2-4: Bottom Panel of the AU-ODU................................................................................................... 39
Figure 2-5: Bottom Panel of the SU-ODU (Without the Service Box)......................................................... 40
Figure 2-6: BMAX-BST-SH Chassis Slot Assignments .............................................................................. 44
Figure 2-7: PIU Module Front Panel ........................................................................................................... 46
Figure 2-8: PSU Module Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 49
Figure 2-9: AU-IDU Module Front Panel..................................................................................................... 50
Figure 2-10: NPU Module Front Panel........................................................................................................ 52
Figure 2-11: AVU Drawer Front Panel ........................................................................................................ 58
Figure 2-12: Micro Base Station Front Panel.............................................................................................. 61
Figure 2-13: CPE-IDU-1D Front Panel ....................................................................................................... 66
Figure 2-14: CPE-IDU-1D 3D View............................................................................................................. 66
Figure 4-1: Micro Base Station Monitor’s Main Menu................................................................................. 88
Figure 4-2: NPU Monitor’s Main Menu........................................................................................................ 95
Figure 4-3: Base Station Chassis Slot Assignments .................................................................................. 98
Figure 4-4: Counters Description .............................................................................................................. 128
Figure 4-5: Counters Description .............................................................................................................. 146
Figure 4-6: Uplink and Downlink Scheduled Transmissions..................................................................... 148
Figure A-1: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments .................................................................................... 192
Figure B-1: Counters Description.............................................................................................................. 218
Figure D-1: Base Station’s Chassis Slots Assignment ............................................................................. 231
Tables
Table 1-1: BreezeMAX Frequency Bands .................................................................................................... 2
Table 1-2: Subscriber Unit ODU’s Types...................................................................................................... 5
Table 1-3: PSU Requirements, Configurations with one NPU (excluding PSU redundancy) ................... 11
Table 1-4: PSU Requirements, Configurations with two NPUs (excluding PSU redundancy) .................. 11
Table 1-5: Radio Specifications .................................................................................................................. 17
Table 1-6: Base Station Antennas Electrical Specifications ....................................................................... 19
Table 1-7: SU IDU/ODU Communication.................................................................................................... 19
Table 1-8: AU and Micro Base Station IDU/ODU Communication ............................................................. 20
Table 1-9: Data Communication (Ethernet Ports)....................................................................................... 20
Table 1-10: Configuration and Management .............................................................................................. 21
Table 1-11: Standards Compliance, General ............................................................................................. 21
Table 1-12: Environmental Specifications................................................................................................... 22
Table 1-13: Services ................................................................................................................................... 22
Table 1-14: Mechanical Specifications, Subscriber Unit............................................................................. 24
Table 1-15: Connectors, Subscriber Unit.................................................................................................... 24
Table 1-16: Electrical Specifications, Subscriber Unit ................................................................................ 25
Table 1-17: Mechanical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment ................................................ 25
Table 1-18: Electrical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment .................................................... 26
Table 1-19: Connectors, Modular Base Station Equipment........................................................................ 27
Table 1-20: Mechanical Specifications, Micro Base Station Equipment..................................................... 27
Table 1-21: Electrical Specifications, Micro Base Station Equipment ........................................................ 28
Table 1-22: Connectors, Micro Base Station Equipment............................................................................ 28
Table 1-23: Mechanical Specifications, Base Station Antennas................................................................. 29
Table 2-1: IF Cables Requirements ............................................................................................................ 35
Tables
Table 2-2: Maximum IF Cable Length (Double Shielded Cables)...............................................................35
Table 2-3: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables ....................................................................................36
Table 2-4: AU-ODU LEDs ...........................................................................................................................39
Table 2-5: AU-ODU Connectors..................................................................................................................39
Table 2-6: SU-ODU LEDs ...........................................................................................................................40
Table 2-7: SU-ODU Connectors..................................................................................................................41
Table 2-8: Power Requirements, Modular Base Station Equipment...........................................................45
Table 2-9: PIU LEDs....................................................................................................................................46
Table 2-10: PSU Requirements, Configurations with one NPU (excluding PSU redundancy) ..................48
Table 2-11: PSU Requirements, Configurations with two NPUs (excluding PSU redundancy) ................48
Table 2-12: PSU LEDs ................................................................................................................................49
Table 2-13: AU-IDU LEDs ...........................................................................................................................51
Table 2-14: NPU Connectors ......................................................................................................................53
Table 2-15: NPU LEDs ................................................................................................................................54
Table 2-16: AVU LEDs ................................................................................................................................58
Table 2-17: Micro Base Station Connectors................................................................................................61
Table 2-18: Micro Base Station LEDs .........................................................................................................62
Table 2-19: CPE-IDU-1D Connectors .........................................................................................................67
Table 2-20: CPE-IDU-1D LEDs ...................................................................................................................67
Table 3-1: Basic NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters ...............................................................................70
Table 3-2: AU-ODU LEDs ...........................................................................................................................72
Table 3-3: AU-IDU LEDs .............................................................................................................................73
Table 3-4: NPU LEDs ..................................................................................................................................74
Table 3-5: PIU LEDs....................................................................................................................................75
Table 3-6: PSU LEDs ..................................................................................................................................75
Table 3-7: AVU LEDs ..................................................................................................................................75
Table 3-8: Micro Base Station LEDs ...........................................................................................................76
Table 3-9: SU’s Basic Parameters ..............................................................................................................78
Table 3-10: CPE-IDU-1D LEDs ...................................................................................................................80
BreezeMAX System Manual
xviii
Tables
Table 3-11: SU-ODU LEDs ......................................................................................................................... 81
Table 3-12: SU-ODU LINK QUALITY Bar LEDs Functionality ................................................................... 82
Table 4-1: COM Port Configuration ............................................................................................................ 85
Table 4-2: Group A Traps ......................................................................................................................... 100
Table 4-3: Group B Traps ......................................................................................................................... 101
Table 4-4: Range for the Downlink (Tx) Frequency Parameter ................................................................ 123
Table 4-5: Rates (Modulation Schemes and Coding)............................................................................... 125
Table 4-6: Priority Marking Values............................................................................................................ 162
Table 4-7: CT values................................................................................................................................. 168
Table 4-8: Pre-Configured Data Service Profiles...................................................................................... 171
Table 4-9: Pre-Configured Forwarding Rules for Data Service ................................................................ 172
Table 4-10: Pre-Configured Priority Classifiers for Data Services............................................................ 173
Table 4-11: Pre-Configured QoS Profiles for Data Services .................................................................... 173
Table 4-12: Pre-Configured Voice Service Profiles (for DRAP-based Gateways) ................................... 174
Table 4-13: Pre-Configured Service Profiles for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP Services............................. 174
Table 4-14: Pre-Configured Forwarding Rule for Voice Services............................................................. 175
Table 4-15: Pre-Configured Priority Classifiers for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP Services ......................... 175
Table 4-16: Pre-Configured BE and RT QoS Profile for Voice Services .................................................. 176
Table 4-17: Pre-Configured CG QoS Profile for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP Services ............................. 176
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary ............................................................................ 177
Table A-1: Cable Color Codes .................................................................................................................. 192
Table B-1: SU’s Parameters Summary..................................................................................................... 223
Table D-1: BreezeMAX Trap/Alarm Variables .......................................................................................... 230
Table D-2: Trap/Alarm Severities.............................................................................................................. 232
Table D-3: Trap/Alarm Categories ............................................................................................................ 233
BreezeMAX System Manual
xix
1
Chapter 1 - System Description
In This Chapter:
Introducing BreezeMAX, page 2
Subscriber Units, page 5
Voice and Networking Gateways, page 6
Base Station Equipment, page 8
Networking Equipment, page 14
Management Systems, page 15
Specifications, page 17
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.1
Introducing BreezeMAX
BreezeMAX 3500 is Alvarion’s WiMAX platform for the licensed 3.5 GHz frequency
band. It leverages Alvarion’s market-leading knowledge of Broadband Wireless
Access (BWA), industry leadership, proven field experience, and core technologies
including many years of experience with OFDM technology.
Built from the ground up based on the IEEE 802.16/ETSI HIPERMAN standards,
BreezeMAX 3500 is designed specifically to meet the unique requirements of the
wireless Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) environment and to deliver broadband
access services to a wide range of customers, including residential, SOHO, SME
and multi-tenant customers. Its Media Access Control (MAC) protocol was
designed for point-to-multipoint broadband wireless access applications,
providing a very efficient use of the wireless spectrum and supporting difficult
user environments. The access and bandwidth allocation mechanisms
accommodate hundreds of subscriber units per channel, with subscriber units
that may support different services to multiple end users.
The system uses OFDM radio technology, which is robust in adverse channel
conditions and enables operation in non line of sight links. This allows easy
installation and improves coverage, while maintaining a high level of spectral
efficiency. Modulation and coding can be adapted per burst, ever striving to
achieve a balance between robustness and efficiency in accordance with
prevailing link conditions.
BreezeMAX supports a wide range of network services, including Internet access
(via IP or PPPoE tunneling), VPNs and Voice over IP. Service recognition and
multiple classifiers that can be used for generating various service profiles enable
operators to offer differentiated SLAs with committed QoS for each service profile.
BreezeMAX products are currently available in the 3.4 – 3.6 GHz frequency band,
as shown in Table 1-1. The actual operating frequencies used by the system can
be configured according to applicable radio regulations, license conditions and
specific deployment considerations.
Table 1-1: BreezeMAX Frequency Bands
Series (band)
Uplink Frequency
Downlink Frequency
3.5a
3.3995 to 3.4535 GHz
3.4995 to 3.5535 GHz
3.5b
3.450 to 3.500 GHz
3.550 to 3.600 GHz
* The 3.5 GHz CPEs support the full range. The base station equipment support
either band 3.5a or band 3.5b.
BreezeMAX System Manual
2
Introducing BreezeMAX
A BreezeMAX system comprises the following:
Customer Premise Equipment (CPE): BreezeMAX Subscriber Units and
alvarion’s Voice/Networking Gateways.
Base Station (BST) Equipment: BreezeMAX Base Station equipment,
including the modular Base Station and its components and the stand-alone
Micro Base Station.
Networking Equipment: Standard switches/routers and other networking
equipment, supporting connections to the backbone and/or Internet.
Management Systems: SNMP-based Management, Billing and Customer
Care, and other Operation Support Systems.
BreezeMAX System Manual
3
Chapter 1 - System Description
Figure 1-1: BreezeMAX System Architecture
BreezeMAX System Manual
4
Subscriber Units
1.2
Subscriber Units
The Subscriber Unit (SU) installed at the customer premises, comprises an
Outdoor Unit (ODU) and an Indoor Unit (IDU).
The SU-ODU includes the modem, radio, data
processing and management components of the
SU, serving as an efficient platform for a wide
range of services. It also includes an integral
high-gain flat antenna or a connection to an
external antenna, as described in Table 1-2. The
SU-ODU provides data connections to the Access
Unit (AU), providing bridge functionality, traffic
shaping and classification. It connects to the IDU and to the user’s equipment
through a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port, and it can support up to 512 MAC
addresses.
Table 1-2: Subscriber Unit ODU’s Types
ODU Type
Description
BMAX-CPE-ODU-AV-3.5
Subscriber Outdoor Unit supporting the 3.5a and 3.5b
bands with an integrated vertically polarized antenna
BMAX-CPE-ODU-AH-3.5
Subscriber Outdoor Unit supporting the 3.5a and 3.5b
bands with an integrated horizontally polarized antenna
BMAX-CPE-ODU-E-3.5
Subscriber Outdoor Unit supporting the 3.5a and 3.5b
bands with a connection to an external antenna
The indoor unit is powered from the mains and connects to the SU-ODU via a
Category 5E Ethernet cable. This cable carries the Ethernet data between the two
units as well as power (-54 VDC) and control signals to the SU-ODU. It also
carries status indications from the SU-ODU.
There are two types of SU-IDUs:
The BMAX-CPE-IDU-1D is the basic IDU, functioning as a simple interface
unit with a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port that connects to the user’s
equipment.
The IDU-NG-4D1W Wireless Networking Gateway IDU provides advanced
routing capabilities and can also serve as a Wireless LAN Access Point.
BreezeMAX System Manual
5
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.3
Voice and Networking Gateways
The following Gateways are currently available from Alvarion:
IDU-NG-4D1W: A Networking Gateway that serves also as an SU-IDU,
supporting 4 data ports and 1 Wireless LAN port.
VG-1D1V: A stand-alone (external) Voice Gateway, connecting to an SU-IDU
and supporting 1 data port and 1 POTS port, with advanced routing
functionality.
VG-1D2V: A stand-alone (external) Voice Gateway, connecting to an SU-IDU
and supporting 1 data port and 2 POTS ports, with advanced routing
functionality.
Details on installing, managing and using the Voice Gateways and the Wireless
Networking Gateway is provided separately in the relevant manuals.
These Gateways incorporate the proprietary DRAP protocol for automatic
registration and allocation of resource.
1.3.1
DRAP (Dynamic Resources Allocation
Protocol)
DRAP is a protocol based on IP/UDP between the Gateway (installed behind the
SU) and the BreezeMAX system. The protocol provides an auto-discovery
mechanism for the Gateway, so no specific configuration is required and the
Gateway can automatically locate and register with the BreezeMAX base station.
The protocol uses a few simple messages enabling a Voice Gateway to request
resources when calls are made, and the BreezeMAX to dynamically allocate them.
1.3.2
IDU-NG-4D1W Wireless Networking Gateway
IDU
Alvarion's Wireless Networking Gateway enables operators and service providers
using Alvarion’s BWA system to provide subscribers with a number of broadband
services transparently.
The Wireless Networking Gateway IDU together with the SU-ODU comprises an
SU that provides data connections to the Base Station. The four 10/100Base-T
Ethernet ports connect to the user’s data equipment, providing comprehensive
routing functionality and supporting various security features. User’s data
equipment equipped with either IEEE 802.11b (11M) or IEEE 802.11g (54M)
compatible wireless adapters can connect to the unit via its built-in Wireless LAN
port, functioning as an Access Point.
BreezeMAX System Manual
6
Voice and Networking Gateways
The Wireless Networking Gateway IDU is
powered from the mains and connects to the
ODU via a Category 5E Ethernet cable. This
cable carries the Ethernet data between the
two units as well as power (54 VDC) and
control signals to the ODU. It also carries
status indications from the ODU.
The Wireless Networking Gateway is designed for remote management and
supervision using either the built-in internal web server or SNMP.
The Wireless Networking Gateway is easily updated and upgraded as it supports
remote software and configuration file download.
1.3.3
VG-1D1V and VG-1D2V Voice Gateways
Alvarion’s Voice Gateways enable operators and service providers to offer end
users a combination of IP-telephony and broadband data services.
IP-telephony services are supported for
standard analog phones or G3 fax machines.
The VG-1D1V has a single POTS interface,
and the VG-1D2V has two POTS interfaces.
The Voice Gateways is built on the H.323 and SIP standards and support both
narrow (compressed) and wideband (uncompressed) speech codecs, silence
suppression with comfort noise, line echo cancellation and regional telephone
parameters. Class 5 services such call waiting and 3-party call are also
supported.
Up to five telephones can be connected in series to each telephone port. Daisy
chaining of Voice Gateways enables the service provider to offer certain end
users, for example small offices, additional telephone numbers.
The Voice Gateway also supports Internet access or any other Ethernet based
services, and can be configured to work in switch (layer 2) or router (layer 3)
mode. The unit can be installed behind a router/NAT due to NAT traversal
support allowing signaling as well as voice packets to correctly reach Softswitch
or Gatekeeper for bi-directional call initiations. The Gateway can handle up to 16
simultaneous VLANs, enabling the operator to offer different services to different
end users behind the unit.
The Voice Gateways are designed for remote management and supervision using
either the built-in internal web server or SNMP.
The Voice Gateways are easily updated and upgraded as they support remote
software and configuration file download.
BreezeMAX System Manual
7
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.4
Base Station Equipment
The BreezeMAX Base Station Equipment includes a modular Base Station that
can serve up to six sectors and a stand-alone Micro Base Station. The Multi
Carrier, High Power, Full Duplex Base Station and Micro Base Station provide all
the functionality necessary to communicate with SUs and to connect to the
backbone of the Service Provider.
1.4.1
Modular Base Station
The modular Base Station comprises the following elements:
1.4.1.1
Base Station Chassis
The Base Station Equipment is based
on an 8U high cPCI (compact
Peripheral Component Interconnect)
shelf designed for installation in a
19” or 21” (ETSI) rack. This chassis
has a total of nine double Euro (6U
high) slots and six single Euro (3U
high) slots. All the modules are hot
swappable, and high availability can
be provided through multiple
redundancy schemes.
The six single Euro slots are intended for one or two redundant Power Interface
Units (PIU) and up to four redundant Power Supply Units (PSUs).
One of the double Euro slots is dedicated to the Network Processing Unit (NPU)
module, supporting a central networking and management architecture. Another
double Euro slot is reserved for an optional redundant NPU (NPU redundancy
support is planned for a future release).
The remaining seven double Euro slots are dedicated mainly for Access Unit (AU)
indoor modules, thus enabling various future redundancy configurations. Each of
these slots will also be able to host a Network Interface Unit (NIU) to allow for
NxE1 or ATM backbone connectivity in future releases.
Additionally, the Base Station chassis contains an air convection and ventilation
fan tray (AVU).
BreezeMAX System Manual
8
Base Station Equipment
1.4.1.2
Network Processing Unit (NPU)
The Network Processing Unit is the “heart” of the BreezeMAX Base Station. The
NPU module serves as the central processing unit that manages the base
station’s components and the SUs served by it. It also aggregates the traffic from
the AU modules and transfers it to the IP Backbone through a dedicated
Gigabit/Fast Ethernet interface. The NPU main functions are:
Aggregate backbone Ethernet connectivity via a 100/1000
Base-T network interface.
Traffic classification and connection establishment
initiation.
Policy based data switching.
Service Level Agreements management.
Centralized agent in the Base Station to manage all cell
site’s AUs and all registered SUs.
Base Station overall operation control, including AU diagnostic and control,
PSU monitoring, AVU management and redundancy support.
Alarms management, including external alarm inputs and activation of
external devices (future option).
Synchronization, including GPS antenna interface (future option), clock and
IF reference generation and distribution to the Base Station modules as well
as to other collocated Base Station chassis.
An SNMP agent incorporated into the NPU enables extensive In Band (IB)
management of the Base Station and all its registered SUs. Out Of Band (OOB)
management is supported through a dedicated 10/100 Base-T interface. A serial
RS-232 port supports local configuration, monitoring and debugging.
Two NPU modules can be used to provide a 1+1 redundancy scheme. The
redundancy mechanism, to be supported in future releases, will be based on a
Master <-> Slave principle, where the slave is in passive mode and is constantly
updating all the learning tables and networking parameters of the master card.
BreezeMAX System Manual
9
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.4.1.3
Access Unit (AU)
The AU comprises an Indoor Unit (IDU) and an Outdoor Unit (ODU). The double
Euro AU-IDU module connects to the AU-ODU via an Intermediate Frequency (IF)
cable. The IF cable carries full duplex data, control and management signals
between the AU-IDU and the AU-ODU, as well as power (48 VDC) and 64 MHz
synchronization reference clock from the AU-IDU to the AU-ODU. The IF Tx and
Rx frequencies are 240 MHz and 140 MHz, respectively. IDU-ODU service
channel at 14 MHz serves for bi-directional control, status and management
signaling.
1.4.1.3.1
AU-IDU
The double Euro AU-IDU module contains the wireless
IEEE 802.16a MAC and modem and is responsible for the
wireless network connection establishment and for bandwidth
management. Each AU-IDU connects to the NPU via the back
plane. In addition, each AU-IDU connects to all other AU/NIU
slots via the back plane over a shared bus for future support of
TDM traffic connectivity.
Each AU-IDU includes two 3.5/1.75 MHz PHY channels that
provide provisioning to the planned support for a future release
of 2nd order of diversity and IF and radio link redundancy. In the
current release, a single channel is supported.
1.4.1.3.2
AU-ODU
The AU-ODU is a high power, full duplex multi-carrier
radio unit that connects to an external antenna. It is
designed to provide high system gain and interference
robustness utilizing high transmit power and low noise
figure. It supports a bandwidth of up to 14 MHz, enabling
future options such as increased capacity through the use
of a multiplexer or larger channels (e.g. 7/14MHz).
1.4.1.4
Power Interface Unit (PIU)
The single Euro PIU module is the interface between the Base
Station site’s DC power source and the Base Station chassis PSUs
and external AU-ODUs, which receive power via the AU-IDUs.
The PIU filters and stabilizes the Base Station input power and
protects the system from power problems such as over voltage,
surge pulses, reverse polarity connection and short circuits. It also
filters high frequency interference (radiated emissions) and low
frequency interference (conducted emissions) to the external power source. Each
Base Station chassis contains two slots for an optional 1+1 PIU redundancy. One
BreezeMAX System Manual
10
Base Station Equipment
PIU is sufficient to support a fully populated chassis. Two PIU modules provide
redundant power feeding (two input sources) while avoiding current flow between
the two input sources.
1.4.1.5
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
The single Euro PSU module is a 48 VDC power supply unit. Each
Base Station chassis can contain up to four PSU modules providing
N+1 redundancy configurations.
Table 1-3 displays the number of PSU modules (excluding
redundant units) required for various Base Station configurations
without NPU redundancy (one NPU):
Table 1-3: PSU Requirements, Configurations with one NPU
(excluding PSU redundancy)
Number of AUs
Minimum Required Number of PSUs
1-2
1
3-6
2
Table 1-4 displays the number of PSU modules (excluding redundant units)
required for various Base Station configurations with NPU redundancy (two
NPUs, not supported in current version):
Table 1-4: PSU Requirements, Configurations with two NPUs
(excluding PSU redundancy)
Number of AUs
Minimum Required Number of PSUs
1-5
2
6
3
1.4.1.6
Air Ventilation Unit (AVU)
The 2U high AVU includes a 1U high integral chamber for inlet airflow and a 1U
high fan tray with an internal alarm module. To support high availability Base
Station, the fan tray includes 10 brush-less fans, where 9 fans are sufficient for
cooling a fully loaded chassis. A failure in any of the fans is indicated by both the
front panel LEDs and a trap that is sent to the management system. To further
support high availability, the chassis may operate with the hot-swappable fan
tray extracted from it for a period of time sufficient for replacing it (up 10
minutes).
BreezeMAX System Manual
11
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.4.2
Micro Base Station
The Micro Base Station Unit is designed to provide an alternative to the
BreezeMAX Modular Base Station and a low cost solution in places were the
number of subscribers is limited, and only one or two sectors are necessary (i.e.
communities areas). The use of the same AU-ODU that is used by the modular
Base Station provides an easy migration path and protection of the initial
investment when the customer base increases and there is a need to replace the
Micro Base Station with the full, modular Base Station equipment.
The Micro Base Station equipment comprises an indoor Micro Base Station Unit
and an outdoor radio unit (AU-ODU).
1.4.2.1
Micro Base Station Indoor Unit
The Micro Base Station unit provides the full base station functionality necessary
for serving a single sector. There are two different models: one is powered from
the AC mains (110 or 220 VAC), and the other is powered from a -48 VDC power
source. The functionality of the Micro Base station is very similar to the combined
functionalities of NPU and AU-IDU modules of the modular Base Station.
The functionality of the Micro Base Station unit includes:
Backbone Ethernet connectivity via a 10/100 Base-T network interface
Traffic classification and connection establishment initiation
Policy based data switching
Service Level Agreements management
Centralized agent for managing the Micro Base Station unit and all registered
SUs
Alarms management, including external alarm inputs and activation of
external devices (future option).
An SNMP agent incorporated into the unit enables extensive In-Band (IB)
management of the Micro Base Station and all its registered SUs. Out-Of-Band
BreezeMAX System Manual
12
Base Station Equipment
(OOB) management is supported through a dedicated 10/100 Base-T interface. A
serial RS-232 port supports local configuration, monitoring and debugging.
The Micro Base Station also contains the wireless IEEE 802.16a MAC and
modem. It includes two 3.5/1.75 MHz PHY channels that provide provisioning to
the planned support for a future release of 2nd order of diversity and IF and radio
link redundancy. In the current release, a single channel is supported.
1.4.2.1.1
AU-ODU
The AU-ODU of the Micro Base Station, identical to the AU-ODU of the modular
Base Station, is a high power, full duplex multi-carrier radio unit that connects to
an external antenna. It is designed to provide high system gain and interference
robustness utilizing high transmit power and low noise figure. It supports a
bandwidth of up to 14 MHz, enabling future options such as increased capacity
through the use of a multiplexer or larger channels (e.g. 7/14 MHz).
The Micro Base Station unit connects to the AU-ODU via an Intermediate
Frequency (IF) cable. The IF cable carries full duplex data, control and
management signals between the Micro Base Station and the AU-ODU, as well as
power (48 VDC) and 64 MHz synchronization reference clock from the Micro Base
Station IDU to the AU-ODU. The IF Tx and Rx frequencies are 240 MHz and
140 MHz, respectively. IDU-ODU service channel at 14 MHz serves for bidirectional control, status and management signaling.
BreezeMAX System Manual
13
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.5
Networking Equipment
The modular Base Station and the Micro Base Station equipment are connected
to the backbone through standard data communication and telecommunication
equipment. In the modular Base Station, the NPU aggregates the traffic from all
AUs, connecting to the backbone through a 100/1000 Base-T port. The Micro
Base Station connects to the backbone through a 10/100 Base-T port.
The point-to-point link from the Base Station/Micro Base Station to the backbone
can be either wired or wireless.
BreezeMAX System Manual
14
Management Systems
1.6
Management Systems
The end-to-end IP-based architecture of the system enables full management of
all components, using standard management tools. An SNMP agent in the
NPU/Micro Base Station implements standard and proprietary MIBs for remote
setting of operational modes and parameters of the NPU/Micro Base Station as
well as all other system components that are managed by the NPU/Micro Base
Station. The same SNMP management tools can also be used to manage other
system components including switches, routers and transmission equipment.
Security features incorporated in BreezeMAX units restrict the access for
management purposes.
In addition, the Ethernet WAN can be used to connect to other Operation Support
Systems including servers, Customer Care systems and AAA (Authentication,
Authorization and Admission) tools.
1.6.1
AlvariSTAR™
AlvariSTAR is a comprehensive Carrier-Class network management system for
Alvarion’s Broadband Wireless Access products-based Networks. AlvariSTAR is
designed for today’s most advanced Service Providers’ Network Operation Centers
(NOCs), providing the network Operation, Administration and Maintenance
(OA&M) staff and managers with all the network surveillance, monitoring and
configuration capabilities that they require in order to effectively manage the
BWA network while keeping the resources and expenses at a minimum.
AlvariSTAR is designed to offer the network’s OA&M staff with a unified, scalable
and distributable network management system. AlvariSTAR system uses a
distributed client-server architecture, which provides the service provider with a
robust, scalable and fully redundant network management system in which all
single points of failure can be avoided.
AlvariSTAR provides the following BWA network management functionality:
Device Discovery
Device Inventory
Topology
Fault Management
Configuration Management
Service Management
BreezeMAX System Manual
15
Chapter 1 - System Description
Performance Monitoring
Device embedded software upgrade
Security Management
Northbound interface to other Network Management Systems.
Embedded with the entire knowledge base of BWA network operations,
AlvariSTAR is a unique state-of-the-art power multiplier in the hands of the
service provider that enables the provisioning of satisfied customers. AlvariSTAR
dramatically extends the abilities of the service provider to provide a rich portfolio
of services and to support rapid customer base expansion.
BreezeMAX System Manual
16
Specifications
1.7
Specifications
1.7.1
Radio
Table 1-5: Radio Specifications
Item
Description
Frequency
Unit/Band
Uplink (MHz)
Downlink (MHz)
AU-ODU-
3399.5-3453.5
3499.5-3553.5
3450-3500
3550-3600
SU-ODU-3.5
3399.5-3500
3499.5-3600
AU, Micro
Base Station
FDD, Full duplex
SU
FDD, Half Duplex
3.5a
AU-ODU3.5b
Operation Mode
Channel Bandwidth
3.5 MHz
1.75 MHz
Central Frequency
Resolution
0.125 MHz
SU-ODU-AV Integral
Vertical Antenna
18 dBi, 15o AZ x 18o EL, vertical polarization,
compliant with EN 302 085, V1.1.1 Range 1
SU-ODU-AH Integral
Horizontal Antenna
18 dBi, 18o AZ x 15o EL, horizontal polarization,
compliant with EN 302 085 V1.1.2 Range 1
Antenna Port
N-Type, 50 ohm
(SU-ODU-E, AU-ODU)
Max. Input Power
AU-ODU
(at antenna port)
-60 dBm before saturation,
-17 dBm before damage
SU-ODU
-20 dBm before saturation
0 dBm before damage
BreezeMAX System Manual
17
Chapter 1 - System Description
Table 1-5: Radio Specifications
Item
Description
Output Power
(at antenna port)
AU-ODU
28 dBm +/-1 dB maximum.
Power control range: 15dB
18-28 dBm @ +/-1 dB, 13-18 dBm @ +/-2 dB
SU-ODU
20 dBm +/-1 dB maximum,
ATPC Dynamic range: 40 dB
Modulation
OFDM modulation, 256 FFT points;
BPSK, QPSK, QAM16, QAM64
FEC
Convolutional Coding: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
Bit Rate and Typical
Channel
Sensitivity (PER=1%)
Spacing
3.5 MHz bandwidth
1.75 MHz bandwidth
Modulation
Net Phy
Sensitivity
Net Phy
Sensitivity
& Coding
Bit rate
(Mbps)
(dBm)
Bit rate
(Mbps)
(dBm)
BPSK 1/2
1.41
-100
0.71
-103
BPSK 3/4
2.12
-98
1.06
-101
QPSK 1/2
2.82
-97
1.41
-100
QPSK 3/4
4.23
-94
2.12
-97
QAM16 1/2
5.64
-91
2.82
-94
QAM16 3/4
8.47
-88
4.24
-91
QAM64 2/3
11.29
-83.0
5.65
-86
QAM64 3/4
12.71
-82.0
6.35
-85
BreezeMAX System Manual
18
Specifications
1.7.2
Base Station Antennas (optional)
Table 1-6: Base Station Antennas Electrical Specifications
Item
Description
BST ANT 3.5/60V
16 dBi, 60o AZ x 10o EL, vertical polarization,
compliant with EN 302 085, V1.1.2 CS3
BST ANT 3.5/90V
14 dBi, 90o AZ x 8o EL, vertical polarization,
compliant with EN 302 085, V1.1.1 CS3
BST ANT 3.5/60H
16 dBi, 60o AZ x 9o EL, horizontal polarization,
compliant with EN 302 085, V1.1.1 CS3
BST ANT 3.5/90H
14 dBi, 85o AZ x 9o EL, vertical polarization,
compliant with EN 302 085, V1.1.1 CS3
BST ANT 3.5/OMNI
10 dBi, 360o AZ x 8o EL, vertical polarization
1.7.3
SU IDU/ODU Communication
Table 1-7: SU IDU/ODU Communication
Item
Description
Cable Type
Category 5E, Outdoor Data Cable, Double Jacket, 4x2x24# FTP
Maximum Length
100 meter
BreezeMAX System Manual
19
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.7.4
AU and Micro Base Station IDU/ODU
Communication
Table 1-8: AU and Micro Base Station IDU/ODU Communication
Item
Description
Tx: 240 MHz
IF Frequency
Rx: 140 MHz
Ref Synchronization Frequency
64 MHz
Bi-Directional Control Frequency
14 MHz
IF cable Impedance
50 ohm
Maximum IF cable Attenuation
19 dB @ 240 MHz
15 dB @ 140 MHz
8 dB @ 64 MHz
Minimum IF cable Shielding
Effectiveness
90 dB in the 10-300 MHz band
Maximum IF cable Return Loss
20 dB in the 10-300 MHz band
Maximum IF cable DC Resistance
4.0 ohm
1.7.5
Data Communication (Ethernet Ports)
Table 1-9: Data Communication (Ethernet Ports)
Item
Description
Standard Compliance
IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
Speed
NPU Data Port
100/1000 Mbps, Full Duplex
Micro Base Station Data Port
10/100 Mbps, Full Duplex
NPU/Micro Base Station
Management Port
10/100 Mbps, Half/Full Duplex
with Auto Negotiation
SU Data Port
10/100 Mbps, Half/Full Duplex
with Auto Negotiation
BreezeMAX System Manual
20
Specifications
1.7.6
Configuration and Management
Table 1-10: Configuration and Management
Item
Description
SU Local Management (OOB)
Telnet via the Ethernet port
NPU/Micro Base Station Out Of
Telnet via Management port
Band (OOB) Management
SNMP via Management port
Monitor port
NPU/Micro Base Station In Band
(IB) Management via Data Port
SNMP Agents
SNMP
Telnet
SNMP ver 1 client
MIB II (RFC 1213), Private BreezeMAX MIBs
Authentication
X509v3 digital certificate
Software upgrade
Using TFTP via NPU/Micro Base Station
Configuration upload/download
Using TFTP via NPU/Micro Base Station
1.7.7
Standards Compliance, General
Table 1-11: Standards Compliance, General
Type
Standard
EMC
ETSI EN 300 489-1
Safety
EN 60950 (CE)
IEC 60 950 US/C (TUV)
Environmental
ETS 300 019:
Part 2-1 T 1.2 & part 2-2 T 2.3 for indoor & outdoor
Part 2-3 T 3.2 for indoor
Part 2-4 T 4.1E for outdoor
Radio
ETSI EN 301 021 V.1.5.1
ETSI EN 301 753 V.1.1.1
BreezeMAX System Manual
21
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.7.8
Environmental
Table 1-12: Environmental Specifications
Type
Unit
Details
Operating
temperature
Outdoor units
-40°C to 55°C
Indoor equipment
0°C to 40°C
Operating
Outdoor units
5%-95% non condensing, Weather protected
Indoor equipment
5%-95% non condensing
humidity
1.7.9
Services
Table 1-13: Services
Item
Description
Max number of Services per
BST/µBST
BST: 4,095
µBST: 1,023
(One or several services may be defined per
subscriber, one or more subscribers can be
supported per SU)
Min number of data connections per
2 (1 uplink, 1 downlink)
Service
Max number of data connections per
Service
8 (4 uplink, 4 downlink)
Max number of data connections per
SU
126
Max number of data connections per
AU/µBST
3999 - 3 x number of SUs
(3 connections are reserved for each SU)
Max number of SUs per AU
510
Max number of SUs per µBST
254
Max number of AUs per BST
7
BreezeMAX System Manual
22
Specifications
Table 1-13: Services
Item
Description
Max number of MAC addresses in
Bridging Table
BST: 6,000
µBST: 1,000
SU: 512
(Aging time is configurable. The default is 3
minutes for SU, 10 minutes for NPU/ µBST)
Max number of VLANs per Service
16
Max number of VLANs per
BST/µBST
1,024
Max number of concurrent calls per
10
Voice Service
Max number of MAC Addresses
512
forwarded by SU
BreezeMAX System Manual
23
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.7.10 Physical and Electrical
1.7.10.1
Subscriber Unit
1.7.10.1.1 Mechanical
Table 1-14: Mechanical Specifications, Subscriber Unit
Unit
Dimensions (cm)
Weight (kg)
CPE-IDU-1D
14 x 6.6 x 3.5
0.3
CPE-ODU-AV/AH
31.5 x 11 x 31.5
3
CPE-ODU-E
31.5 x 8.8 x 15.7
2.4
1.7.10.1.2 Connectors
Table 1-15: Connectors, Subscriber Unit
Unit
Connector
Description
CPE-IDU-1D
ETHERNET
10/100Base-T (RJ-45).
Cable connection to a PC: Straight
Cable connection to a hub: Crossed
RADIO
10/100Base-T (RJ-45)
AC IN
3 pin AC power plug
INDOOR
10/100Base-T (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof
CPE-ODU-AV/AH
sealing assembly
CPE-ODU-E
INDOOR
10/100Base-T (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof
sealing assembly
ANT
N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
BreezeMAX System Manual
24
Specifications
1.7.10.1.3 Electrical
Table 1-16: Electrical Specifications, Subscriber Unit
Item
Power Consumption
(including ODU)
44W
CPE-IDU Power Input
100-240 VAC, 47-63 Hz
CPE-ODU Power Input
54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable
1.7.10.2
Modular Base Station Equipment
1.7.10.2.1 Mechanical
Table 1-17: Mechanical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment
Unit
Dimensions (cm)
Weight (kg)
BST-SH
8U ETSI type shelf, 8U x 43.19 x 24
6.9 (excluding AVU)
PIU
3U x 5HP x 16
0.35
PSU
3U x 8HP x 16
0.7
NPU
6U x 7HP x 16
0.7
AU-IDU
6U x 7HP x 16.
0.6
AU-ODU
31.5 x 8.8 x 15.7
2.9
AVU
2U x 84HP x 16
1.7
* 1U=44.45 mm (1.75”), 1HP=5.08 mm (0.2”)
BreezeMAX System Manual
25
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.7.10.2.2 Electrical
Table 1-18: Electrical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment
Unit
Details
Power Source
-40.5 to -60 VDC
Full Base station
(including ODUs)
671W maximum for a fully equipped base station, including
ODUs (1 NPU, 6 AUs with 1 ODU per AU, 1+1 PIUs, 2+1 PSUs)
Full Chassis
(excluding ODUs)
479W maximum for a fully equipped chassis, excluding ODUs
(1 NPU, 6 AU-IDUs, 1+1 PIUs, 2+1 PSUs)
PIU
16W maximum
PSU
200W maximum output power
Efficiency: 75% minimum, 80% typical
NPU
65W maximum, 44W typical
AU-IDU
41W maximum, 29W typical
AU-ODU
32W maximum, 27W typical
AVU
24W maximum, 23W typical
BreezeMAX System Manual
26
Specifications
1.7.10.2.3 Connectors
Table 1-19: Connectors, Modular Base Station Equipment
Unit
Connector
Description
PIU
-48V
3 pin/40A D-Type male
Amphenol P/N 717TWA3W3PHP2V4RRM6
NPU
DATA
100/1000Base-T (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs.
Cable connection to a PC: Crossed
Cable connection to a hub: Straight
MGMT
10/100Base-T (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs.
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
Cable connection to a hub: Straight
GPS/SYNC IN
15-pin micro D-Type jack
GPS/SYNC OUT
15-pin micro D-Type jack
AL-IN
9-pin micro D-Type jack
AL-OUT
9-pin micro D-Type jack
MON
3-pin low profile jack
AU-IDU
ODU 1, ODU 2
2 x TNC jack, lightning protected
AU-ODU
IF
TNC jack, lightning protected
ANT
N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
1.7.10.3
Micro Base Station Equipment
1.7.10.3.1 Mechanical
Table 1-20: Mechanical Specifications, Micro Base Station Equipment
Unit
Dimensions (cm)
Weight (kg)
Micro Base
Station IDU
1U ETSI type shelf, 1U x 44.4 x 27.2
3
AU-ODU
31.5 x 8.8 x 15.7
2.9
* 1U=44.45 mm (1.75”)
BreezeMAX System Manual
27
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.7.10.3.2 Electrical
Table 1-21: Electrical Specifications, Micro Base Station Equipment
Unit
Details
Power Source
AC model: 85 – 265 VAC, 47 – 63 Hz
DC model: -40.5 to -60 VDC
Micro Base Station
IDU Power
Consumption
85W maximum
AU-ODU Power
Consumption
32W maximum, 27W typical
1.7.10.3.3 Connectors
Table 1-22: Connectors, Micro Base Station Equipment
Connector
Micro Base
Station IDU
Description
AC IN (on rear panel
of AC model)
3 pin AC power outlet
DC IN (on rear panel
of DC model)
3 pin D-Type male
Amphenol P/N 17TWA3W3PR157
DATA
10/100Base-T (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs.
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
Cable connection to a hub: Straight
MGMT
10/100Base-T (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs.
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
Cable connection to a hub: Straight
AU-ODU
ALRM IN
9-pin micro D-Type jack
ALRM OUT
9-pin micro D-Type jack
MON
3-pin low profile jack
ODU 1, ODU 2
2 x TNC jack, lightning protected
IF
TNC jack, lightning protected
ANT
N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
BreezeMAX System Manual
28
Specifications
1.7.10.4
Base Station Antennas
Table 1-23: Mechanical Specifications, Base Station Antennas
Unit
Description
Dimensions (cm)
Weight (kg)
BST ANT 3.5/60V
Mounting kit: 2” to 4” pole.
50 x 20 x 3
1.5
60 x 25 x 5.5
2
48 x 20 x 4
2
60 x 25 x 5.5
2
68 x 3.4 diameter
0.8
Connector: N-Type female
BST ANT 3.5/90V
Mounting kit: 2” to 4” pole.
Connector: N-Type female
BST ANT 3.5/60H
Mounting kit: 2” to 4” pole.
Connector: N-Type female
BST ANT 3.5/90H
Mounting kit: 2” to 4” pole.
Connector: N-Type female
BST ANT 3.5/OMNI
Mounting bracket: 30 to 53 mm
pole
Connector: N-Type female
BreezeMAX System Manual
29
2
Chapter 2 - Installation
In This Chapter:
Installing the ODU, page 32
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment, page 43
Installing the Micro Base Station Equipment, page 60
Installing the CPE-IDU-1D Indoor Unit, page 65
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.1
Installing the ODU
The following sections describe how to install the outdoor units of the CPE
(SU-ODU) and of the Base Station equipment (the AU-ODU is the outdoor unit of
each AU-IDU in the modular Base Station and of the Micro Base Station),
including pole mounting the ODU, and connecting the cables.
2.1.1
ODU Installation Requirements
2.1.1.1
AU-ODU Packing List
ODU:
BMAX-BST-AU-ODU-3.5a, AU-ODU operating in the 3.5a band
OR
BMAX-BST-AU-ODU-3.5b, AU-ODU operating in the 3.5b band
Pole mounting kit
2.1.1.2
SU-ODU Packing List
ODU:
BMAX-CPE-ODU-AV-3.5, a CPE ODU with an integral vertically polarized
antenna
OR
BMAX-CPE-ODU-AH-3.5, a CPE ODU with an integral horizontally
polarized antenna
OR
BMAX-CPE-ODU-E-3.5, a CPE ODU with a connector to an external
antenna (not included)
Pole mounting kit
BreezeMAX System Manual
32
Installing the ODU
2.1.1.3
Additional Installation Requirements
The following items are also required to install the ODU:
For AU-ODU: IF cable with two TNC connectors* (see IF Cables on page 35 for
details on IF cable types and length).
For SU-ODU: Indoor-to-outdoor Category 5E Ethernet cable with two shielded
RJ-45 connectors* (see Subscriber Unit' s IDU-ODU Cables on page 36 for
details on approved cables and maximum length), and an RJ-45 connectors
crimping tool.
For units that connect to an external antenna: Antenna* and RF cable* for
connecting the antenna to the ODU
Grounding cable with an appropriate termination.
Installation tools and materials, including appropriate means (e.g. a 1” to 4”
pole) for installing the ODU (and antenna where applicable).
NOTE
Items marked with an asterisk (*) are available from Alvarion.
BreezeMAX System Manual
33
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.1.2
Guidelines for Positioning the ODU
This section provides key guidelines for selecting the optimal installation
locations for the various BreezeMAX components.
CAUTION
ONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes
and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should
install outdoor units and antennas.
Failure to do so may void the BreezeMAX product warranty and may expose the end user or
Service Provider to legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not
liable for injury, damage or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units or
antennas.
Select the optimal locations for the equipment using the following guidelines:
The ODU can be either pole or wall mounted. Its location should enable easy
access to the unit for installation and testing.
The higher the placement of the antenna, the better the achievable link
quality.
The antenna of the Access Unit/Micro Base Station should be installed so as
to provide coverage to all Subscriber Units within its service area.
NOTE
The recommended minimum distance between any two antennas is 0.5 meters.
The antenna of the SU should be installed to provide a direct, or near line of
sight with the Base Station antenna. The antenna should be aligned to face
the Base Station.
Outdoor units with a connection to an external antenna should be installed
as close as possible to the antenna.
BreezeMAX System Manual
34
Installing the ODU
2.1.3
IF Cables
The AU-ODU is connected to the AU-IDU/Micro Base Station via an IF cable
carrying both signals and power. The maximum permitted attenuation of the IF
cable at applicable frequencies, its screening effectiveness and its maximum
permitted DC resistance (the sum of the DC resistance of the inner and outer
conductors) are provided in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1: IF Cables Requirements
Item
Description
Screening Effectiveness
90 dB minimum in the 10-300 MHz band.
IF cable Impedance
50 ohm
Maximum IF cable Attenuation
19 dB @ 240 MHz
15 dB @ 140 MHz
8 dB @ 64 MHz
Maximum IF cable DC Resistance
4.0 ohm
Maximum IF cable Return Loss
20 dB in the 10-300 MHz band
To comply with the required screening effectiveness requirement, it is
recommended to use double shielded cables. Table 2-2 provides details on
maximum length for some popular cables.
Table 2-2: Maximum IF Cable Length (Double Shielded Cables)
Cable
Maximum Length
LMR-195
80 meters
LMR-240
150 meters
BreezeMAX System Manual
35
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.1.4
SU’s IDU-ODU Cables
NOTE
The length of the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable, together with the length of the Ethernet cable connecting
the CPE-IDU-1D to the data equipment, should not exceed 100 meters.
Use only Category 5E Ethernet cables from approved manufacturers, listed in
Table 2-3. Consult with Alvarion specialists on the suitability of other cables.
Table 2-3: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables
Manufacturer
Part Number
Superior Cables Ltd.
www.cvalim.co.il
612098
HES Cabling Systems
www.hescs.com
H5E-00481
Southbay Holdings Limited
11th Fl., 15, Lane 347, Jong Jeng Rd.
Shin Juang City, Taipei County
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Attn: Eva Lin
Tel. 886-2-2832 3339
Fax. 886-2-2206 0081
E-mail: [email protected]
TSM2404A0D
Teldor
8393204101
www.teldor.com
BreezeMAX System Manual
36
Installing the ODU
2.1.5
Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit
The Outdoor Unit can be mounted on a 1” to 4” pole using one of the following
options:
Special brackets and open-ended bolts are supplied with each unit. There are
two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit, enabling the special
brackets to be mounted on diverse pole diameters.
The protrusions with grooves on the top backsides of the unit, and the
protrusion on the bottom backside, enable the use of 9/16 inches wide metal
bands (not included with the package) to secure the unit to a pole.
NOTE
Install the unit with the bottom panel, which includes the LEDs, facing downward.
Figure 2-2 illustrates the method of mounting an outdoor unit on a pole, using
the brackets and open-ended bolts.
Figure 2-2: ODU Pole Installation Using Special Brackets
NOTE
Insert the open ended bolts with the grooves pointing outward, as these grooves enable you to use
a screwdriver to fasten the bolts to the unit.
BreezeMAX System Manual
37
Chapter 2 - Installation
Figure 2-3 illustrates the method of mounting an outdoor unit on a pole, using
metal bands.
Figure 2-3: ODU Pole Installation Using Metal Bands
BreezeMAX System Manual
38
Installing the ODU
2.1.6
AU-ODU
I
m
Figure 2-4: Bottom Panel of the AU-ODU
CAUTION
Do not open the impermeability test screw – you may impair the sealing of the unit against moisture
and humidity.
Table 2-4: AU-ODU LEDs
Name
Description
Functionality
PWR
Power indication
Off – ODU is not powered
Green – ODU power OK
ALARM
Not Used
(Red – blinks shortly during ODU power up)
ETH
Wireless link status
Off – No SU is associated
(WLNK)
indication
Green – At least one SU is associated
Table 2-5: AU-ODU Connectors
Name
Connector
Functionality
IF
TNC jack
Connection to the AU-IDU/Micro Base Station
N-Type jack, 50 ohm
Connection to an external antenna
(ANT)
BreezeMAX System Manual
39
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.1.7
SU-ODU
Figure 2-5: Bottom Panel of the SU-ODU (Without the Service Box)
Table 2-6: SU-ODU LEDs
Name
Description
PWR
Power indication
Functionality
Off – ODU is not powered
Green – ODU power is OK
ALARM
Alarm indication
Off – ODU is OK, diagnostic test passed
Red – ODU failure
ETH
Ethernet link status
indication
(Ethernet integrity)
Off – No Ethernet connectivity has been
detected between the outdoor unit and the
device connected to the indoor unit.
Green– Ethernet connectivity has been
detected between the outdoor unit and the
device connected to the indoor unit
LINK QUALITY
bar display
Wireless link status
and signal quality
Indication
LED 1 (orange): WLNK (wireless link
status) – on when the SU is associated
with and receives services from AU/µBST.
LED 2 – LED 9 (green): Link quality
LED 10 (red): Saturation (RSSI> -20 dBm)
See also Table 3-12.
BreezeMAX System Manual
40
Installing the ODU
Table 2-7: SU-ODU Connectors
Name
Connector
Functionality
IDU COM
10/100Base-T (RJ-45)
Connection to the SU-IDU
N-Type jack, 50 ohm
Connection to an external antenna
(ANT)
(only in SU-ODU-E)
2.1.8
Connecting the Cables
2.1.8.1
Connecting the Grounding Cable
The Grounding screw (marked ╤) is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor
unit.
To connect the grounding cable:
2.1.8.2
1
Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw and tighten the
grounding screw firmly.
2
Connect the other end of the grounding cable to a good ground (earth)
connection.
Connecting the Antenna Cable
To connect the RF cable (units with external antenna):
)
1
Connect one end of the coaxial RF cable to the RF connector (marked
located on the bottom panel of the unit.
2
Connect the other end of the RF cable to the antenna.
3
The RF connectors should be properly sealed to protect against rain and
moisture.
2.1.8.3
Connecting the AU-ODU’s IF Cable
To connect the IF cable:
1
Connect one end of the coaxial IF cable to the IF connector on the bottom
panel of the unit.
2
Verify that the length of the IF cable is sufficient to reach the AU-IDU/Micro
Base Station. See IF cable length limitation in IF Cables on page 35.
BreezeMAX System Manual
41
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.1.8.4
3
The IF cable connector should be properly sealed to protect against rain and
moisture.
4
Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment.
Connecting the SU’s IDU-ODU Cable
CAUTION
Use only Category 5E 4x2x24# FTP outdoor cables from an approved manufacturer. See list of
approved cables in Table 2-3 on page 36.
To connect the IDU-ODU cable:
1
Remove the two screws holding the waterproof service box to the outdoor unit
and remove the service box.
2
Unscrew the top nut from the service box.
3
Route a straight, uncrimped Category 5E Ethernet cable (8-wire, 24 AWG)
through both the top nut and the body of the service box.
4
Insert and crimp the RJ-45 connector. Refer to Appendix A for instructions on
preparing the cable.
5
Connect the Ethernet cable to the IDU COM RJ-45 connector.
6
Reposition the service box and then tighten the top nut. Make sure that the
external jack of the cable is well inside the service box to guarantee a good
seal.
7
Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment.
8
Assemble an RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the
IDU-ODU cable.
NOTE
The length of the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable, together with the length of the Ethernet cable connecting
the CPE-IDU-1D to the data equipment, should not exceed 100 meters.
BreezeMAX System Manual
42
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
2.2
Installing the Modular Base Station
Equipment
2.2.1
BST Installation Requirements
2.2.1.1
Packing List
Base Station Chassis:
BMAX-BST-SH Base Station Chassis
BMAX-BST-AVU Air Ventilation Unit (installed)
Cables Tray kit
2.5 meter DC cable
BMAX-BST-PIU (1 or 2 per chassis) Power Interface Unit(s)
2.5 meter DC cable (for a redundant PIU. One cable is supplied with each
chassis)
BMAX-BST-PSU (up to 4 per chassis) Power Supply Unit(s)
BMAX-BST-NPU Network Processing Unit and Monitor cable
BMAX-BST-AU-IDU (up to 6 per chassis) Access Unit Indoor Unit(s)
2.2.1.2
Additional Installation Requirements
The following items are also required to install the BST:
Ethernet cable (straight) for connecting the NPU to a Hub/Switch.
NOTE
The maximum length of the Ethernet cable is 100m when operating at 100 Mbps and 70m when
operating at 1 Gbps.
A grounding cable with appropriate terminations for connecting the chassis to
the rack or another ground (earth) connection.
For installation in a 21” ETSI rack: Two 21” ETSI rack adapters
BreezeMAX System Manual
43
Chapter 2 - Installation
A portable PC for configuring parameters using the Monitor cable (supplied
with the NPU)
Other installation tools and materials
2.2.2
BMAX-BST-SH Chassis Slot Assignments
Cable
Tray
Air
Ventilation
Unit
The Base Station chassis comprises 6 3U high slots and 9 6U high slots, as
shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6: BMAX-BST-SH Chassis Slot Assignments
The Cable Tray (the installation kit is supplied with the chassis) should be
installed on the top of the chassis front to enable convenient routing of cables
connecting to power source(s), outdoor unit(s) and other equipment.
To enable power source and/or Power Interface Unit 1+1 redundancy, two PIU
modules can be installed in the designated slots. If a single PIU module is used, it
can be inserted into either one of the two available slots.
The number of installed PSU modules depends on the specific configuration
(number of AUs) and NPU redundancy scheme (refer to Table 2-10 and Table 211 on page 48). If less than 4 PSU modules are used, they can be installed in any
of the designated slots.
The NPU should be installed in slot number 5 (slot numbers are marked on the
Cable Guide). Slot 6 is reserved for a future redundant NPU.
Slots 1-4 and 7-9 can hold up to six AU-IDU modules.
Unused slots should remain covered until required.
BreezeMAX System Manual
44
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
2.2.3
Power Requirements
Use the following table to calculate power source requirements for the Modular
Base Station equipment:
Table 2-8: Power Requirements, Modular Base Station Equipment
Unit
Details
Power Source
-40.5 to -60 VDC
PIU
16W maximum
PSU
200W max output power
Efficiency: 80% typical
NPU
65W maximum
AU-IDU
41W maximum
AU-ODU
32W maximum
AVU
24W maximum
NOTE
The PSU(s) do not supply power to the AU-ODUs that are powered directly from the power source
via the PIU and the back plane.
2.2.4
Power Interface Unit (PIU)
The single Euro PIU module is the interface between the Base Station site’s DC
power source and the Base Station Chassis Power Supply Units and external
ODUs, which receive power via the IDUs.
The PIU filters and stabilizes the Base Station input power and protects the
system from power problems such as over voltage, surge pulses, reverse polarity
connection and short circuits. It also filters high frequency interference (radiated
emissions) and low frequency interference (conducted emissions) to the external
power source. Each Base Station chassis contains two slots for an optional 1+1
PIU redundancy. One PIU is sufficient to support a fully populated chassis. Two
PIU modules provide redundant power feeding (two input sources) while avoiding
current flow between the two input sources.
BreezeMAX System Manual
45
Chapter 2 - Installation
Figure 2-7: PIU Module Front Panel
Table 2-9: PIU LEDs
LED Status
LED Status
PWR
MASTER
Off
Off
Chassis is not connected to power.
Red
Off
Power is not connected or power input is out of range or PIU
card is damaged. Chassis is powered by the redundant PIU.
Red
Green
Power input is out of range or PIU card is damaged. Chassis is
powered by the PIU.
Green
Off
Power to PIU is OK. PIU is in redundant mode and the chassis
is powered from the other PIU.
Green
Green
Power to PIU is OK. The chassis is powered from the PIU.
BreezeMAX System Manual
46
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
2.2.4.1
Preparing a Power Cable
A 2.5m DC power cable is supplied with each chassis. Additional DC cables can
be ordered from Alvarion. If necessary, use the following instruction to prepare a
DC cable.
To prepare the power cable:
1
Use a cable capable of supporting a current of at least 40A. Use a cable with 2
x 8AWG (or thicker) wires for the power plus an additional 8AWG to 20AWG
ground wire.
2
The matching power connector to be used is Amphenol D-type power P/N
177TWA/3W3/SP3Y with high power socket contacts P/N 17DM53744-1.
3
Connect the cable to the power connector as follows:
Pin 1 (RTN): Red (8 AWG min wire)
Pin 2 (–48V): Black (8 AWG min wire)
Pin 3 (
4
): Ground (shield) (8AWG-20AWG wire)
Attach suitable terminal rings to the side that connects to the power source.
CAUTION
Disconnect power from the PIU module before inserting/ejecting it to/from the chassis. Before
disconnecting the power cable from the PIU, the power source must be disconnected to avoid
irreversible damage due to a potential excessively high transient current.
BreezeMAX System Manual
47
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.2.5
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
The single Euro PSU module is a 48 VDC power supply unit. Each Base Station
chassis can contain up to four PSU modules providing N+1 redundancy
configurations.
The following tables display the number of PSU modules (excluding redundant
units) required for various Base Station configurations:
Table 2-10: PSU Requirements, Configurations with one NPU
(excluding PSU redundancy)
Number of AUs
Minimum Required Number of PSUs
1-2
1
3-6
2
Table 2-11: PSU Requirements, Configurations with two NPUs
(excluding PSU redundancy)
Number of AUs
Minimum Required Number of PSUs
1-5
2
6
3
NOTE
The PSU(s) do not supply power to the AU-ODUs that are powered directly from the power source
via the PIU and the back plane.
BreezeMAX System Manual
48
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
Figure 2-8: PSU Module Front Panel
Table 2-12: PSU LEDs
LED Status
Description
PWR
ALRM
Off
Off
No power or fatal damage
Off
Red
Power input is out of range or PSU is damaged or PSU is
inhibited by NPU.
Green
Off
Power is OK and PSU operates properly.
BreezeMAX System Manual
49
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.2.6
Access Unit Indoor Module (AU-IDU)
The double Euro Access Unit IDU module contains the wireless IEEE 802.16a
MAC and modem and is responsible for the wireless network connection
establishment and for bandwidth management. Each AU-IDU includes two
3.5/1.75 MHz PHY channels that provide provisioning to the planned support for
a future release of 2nd order of diversity and IF and radio link redundancy.
In the current release, a single channel (ODU 1) is supported.
Figure 2-9: AU-IDU Module Front Panel
BreezeMAX System Manual
50
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
Table 2-13: AU-IDU LEDs
Name
Description
PWR
Power indication
Functionality
Off – AU-IDU is not powered
Red – AU-IDU power supply failed (low
power)
Green – AU-IDU power is OK
ALARM
Alarm indication
Off – AU-IDU is OK
Red – AU-IDU failure
WLINK
WACT
Wireless link status
Off – No SU is associated
indication
Green – At least one SU is associated
IDU transmission
indication
Off – No IDU transmission
SP
Spare
IP
IP activity indication
Green – IDU transmission OK
Not Used
Off – No downlink (AU to SU) IP
activity
Green (blinking) – Downlink (AU to SU)
IP activity
ODU1/ODU2 PWR
IDU to ODU Power
Indication
Off – No IDU to ODU power output
Red – IDU to ODU power output failed
Green – IDU to ODU power output OK
ODU1/ODU2 ALRM
Off – IDU-ODU communication OK
Red - IDU-ODU communication failure
BreezeMAX System Manual
51
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.2.7
Network Processing Unit (NPU)
The NPU module serves as the central processing unit that manages the base
station’s components and the SUs served by it. It also aggregates the traffic from
the AU modules and transfers it to the IP backbone through a dedicated
Gigabit/Fast Ethernet interface.
Figure 2-10: NPU Module Front Panel
BreezeMAX System Manual
52
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
Table 2-14: NPU Connectors
Name
Connector
Functionality
DATA
100/1000Base-T (RJ-45)
with 2 embedded LEDs.
Connection to the backbone. Cable
connection to a hub/switch/router:
Straight
MGMT
10/100Base-T (RJ-45)
with 2 embedded LEDs.
Connection to OOB management.
Cable connection to a PC: Crossed
Cable connection to a hub/switch/router:
Straight
GPS/SYNC IN
15-pin micro D-Type jack
Not used currently. Connection to a GPS
receiver or to an NPU in another chassis
that supplies synchronization signals.
GPS/SYNC OUT
15-pin micro D-Type jack
Not used currently. Supply of
synchronization signals to another unit.
ALRM-IN
9-pin micro D-Type jack
Not used currently. Connections to
external alarm indicators
(3 alarm inputs, NC or NO).
ALRM-OUT
9-pin micro D-Type jack
Not used currently. Connections for
activation of external devices (4 dry
contact pairs).
MON
3-pin low profile jack
Access for debugging and configuration
using the Monitor program.
BreezeMAX System Manual
53
Chapter 2 - Installation
Table 2-15: NPU LEDs
Name
Description
PWR
Power indication
Functionality
Off – NPU is not powered
Red – NPU power failure
Green – NPU power is OK
ALRM
NPU Alarm indication
Off – NPU is OK
Red – NPU failure
BST ALRM
Base Station chassis alarm
indication
EXT ALRM
External alarm indication
Off – All Base Station modules are OK
Red – Failure in one (or more) Base
Station modules
Off – No alarms
Red – Alarm received via the ALRM IN
connector
MASTER
GPS/SYNC
Master/Slave operation
indication
Off – Secondary NPU (backup)
GPS/IF clock
Off – GPS/IF clock synchronization is
disabled
synchronization
functionality indication
Green – Primary NPU
Green – GPS/IF clock is
synchronization enabled
BreezeMAX System Manual
54
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
2.2.8
Using the Hot-Swap Injector/Ejector Handles
The Base Station modules include special handles for high-force
insertion/extraction of modules. Each of the 6U high modules (NPU, AU-IDU)
includes two such handles, whereas each of the 3U high-modules (PIU, PSU)
includes a single handle at the bottom of the front panel.
The bottom injector/ejector handle of the NPU and AU-IDU modules includes a
micro-switch to support hot-swap control.
2.2.8.1
Inserting Modules
To insert an NPU or AU-IDU module:
1
Firmly push in the module into its intended slot (slot 5 for the NPU, slot 1-4,
7-9 for AU-IDU).
2
Press the handles up (the upper handle)/down (the lower handle)
simultaneously until you hear the locking click and the red buttons are
released. The blue HOT SWAP LED will briefly turn on, indicating that the
module is being powered up.
3
Secure the module in place by closing the screws at the top and bottom of the
front panel.
NOTE
If a module is fully inserted without properly locking the handles, it will become operational.
However, in this state the hot-swap mechanism is not supported. A warning message (trap) will be
sent.
To insert a PIU or PSU module:
2.2.8.2
1
Firmly push in the module into its intended slot.
2
Press the handle down until you hear the locking click and the red button is
released.
3
Secure the module in place by closing the screw at the top of the front panel.
Ejecting Modules
To eject an NPU or AU-IDU module:
1
Release the screws at the top and the bottom of the front panel.
2
Press the handles’ red button until the handles are unlocked.
3
Wait until the blue HOT SWAP LED turns on, indicationg that the module has
been disconnected and can be removed.
BreezeMAX System Manual
55
Chapter 2 - Installation
4
Press the handles down (the upper handle)/up (the lower handle) until the
module is unlocked, firmly hold the handles and take the module out of the
chassis.
To eject a PIU or PSU module:
1
Release the screw at the top of the front panel.
2
Press the handle’s red button until the handle is unlocked.
3
Press the handle up until the module is unlocked, firmly hold the handle and
take the module out of the chassis.
CAUTION
Disconnect power from the PIU module before inserting/ejecting it to/from the chassis. Before
disconnecting the power cable from the PIU, the power source must be disconnected to avoid
irreversible damage due to potentially excessive high transient current.
BreezeMAX System Manual
56
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
2.2.9
Installing the Base Station Chassis and
Modules
The indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location
where the IF cable(s) enters the building. The location of the indoor equipment
should take into account its connection to the power source(s) and to the base
station networking equipment.
To install the Base Station chassis and modules:
1
Attach the Cable Guide to the top panel of the chassis using the screws and
washers supplied with the Cable Guide.
2
Install the chassis in a 19” cabinet. For installation in a 21” cabinet, attach
suitable ETSI rack adapters to the chassis. To provide a sufficient space for
the Cable Guide and to allow air flow for preventing over-heating, leave a free
space of at least 1U between the upper covers of the chassis and other units
in the cabinet.
3
Connect one end of a grounding cable to the ground terminal located on the
rear panel of the chassis and firmly tighten the grounding screw.
Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground connection or to
the cabinet, if applicable.
4
Carefully insert the modules into the relevant slots. Secure the modules in
their intended locations (refer to Inserting Modules on page 55 for instructions
on modules’ insertion).
5
Place blank covers over all of the unused slots.
6
Connect the DATA port of the NPU to the backbone data equipment (use a
straight Ethernet cable to connect to a hub/switch/router). The maximum
length of the Ethernet cable is 100m when operating at 100 Mbps and 70m
when operating at 1 Gbps.
7
If the MGMT port will be used for remote management, connect it to the
appropriate data equipment (use a straight Ethernet cable to connect to a
hub/switch/router). The maximum length of the Ethernet cable is 100m.
8
Connect the DC power cable to the power jack of the PIU module. If a
redundant PIU is installed, connect a DC power cable also to the second PIU
module. Connect the power cord(s) to the -48 VDC power source(s), as
follows.
Connect the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source.
Connect the red wire to the + (Return) contact.
BreezeMAX System Manual
57
Chapter 2 - Installation
Connect the ground wire to the ground.
9
Connect the IF cable(s) (already connected at the other end to the AU-ODU(s))
to the ODU-1 connector(s) of the applicable AU-IDU module(s). To avoid
transmissions at undesired frequencies, verify that the frequency and
bandwidth parameters are properly configured before connecting the IF
cables.
2.2.10 Air Ventilation Unit (AVU)
Figure 2-11: AVU Drawer Front Panel
The 2U high, 84 HP wide AVU includes a 1U high integral chamber for inlet
airflow and a 1U high fan tray with an internal alarm module. To support a high
availability Base Station, the fan tray includes 10 brush-less fans, where 9 fans
are sufficient for cooling a fully loaded chassis. To further support high
availability, the chassis can operate with the hot-swappable fan tray extracted
from it for a period of time sufficient for replacing it (up to 10 minutes).
Table 2-16: AVU LEDs
LED Status
Description
PWR
ALRM
Off
Off
No 5V power input
Red
Red
12V power failed
Green
Red
One or more fans have failed
Green
Off
AVU operates properly
If the red ALRM LED is on while the PWR LED is green, it indicates a failure of at
least one fan. Although the Base Station chassis may continue operating with one
failed fan, it is recommended to replace the AVU as soon as possible.
To replace an AVU drawer:
1
Release the 4 screws securing the AVU to the chassis.
2
Using the handle take out the faulty chassis.
BreezeMAX System Manual
58
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
3
Insert a new AVU drawer and close the screws. The replacement should be
completed in less than 10 minutes.
2.2.11 Replacing an NPU
To minimize downtime and facilitate fast and easy NPU replacement, it is
recommended to maintain an updated copy of the NPU configuration. Refer to
Backup on page 106 for details on preparing and uploading a backup file of the
NPU configuration.
1
Release the screws at the top and the bottom of the NPU’s front panel.
2
Press the handles’ red button until the handles are unlocked.
3
Wait until the blue HOT SWAP LED turns on, indicating that the module has
been disconnected and can be removed.
4
Press the handles down (the upper handle)/up (the lower handle) until the
module is unlocked. Firmly hold the handles and take the module out of the
chassis.
5
Disconnect all IF cables connecting the AU-IDUs to the AU-ODUs. This is
necessary as the initial configuration of the new NPU is most probably
inappropriate.
6
Firmly push the new NPU module into its intended slot (slot 5).
7
Press the handles up (the upper handle)/down (the lower handle)
simultaneously until you hear the locking click and the red buttons are
released. The blue HOT SWAP LED will briefly turn on, indicating that the
module is being powered up.
8
Secure the module in place by closing the screws at the top and bottom of the
front panel.
9
Download the backup file using a DOS based TFTP. Use the command: tftp-i
<NPU port IP address> put <file name>. The default IP address of the MGMT
port is 10.0.0.1.
10 Use the monitor program to configure the IP parameters (IP address, Subnet
Mask, Default Gateway Address) of the MGMT port. These parameters are not
affected by the loaded file.
11 Reset the system.
12 Reconnect the IF cables.
BreezeMAX System Manual
59
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.3
Installing the Micro Base Station
Equipment
2.3.1
Installation Requirements
2.3.1.1
Packing List
Micro Base Station Unit
Mains power cable or a DC power cable
Monitor cable
2.3.1.2
Additional Installation Requirements
Ethernet cable (straight) for connecting the unit to a hub/switch.
A grounding cable with appropriate terminations for connecting the unit’s
ground terminal to the rack or to a ground connection.
Mains plug adapter or termination plug (if the power plug on the supplied AC
power cord does not fit local power outlets).
For installation in a 21” ETSI rack: two 21” ETSI rack adapters
A portable PC for configuring parameters using the Monitor cable.
Other installation tools and materials
BreezeMAX System Manual
60
Installing the Micro Base Station Equipment
2.3.2
The Micro Base Station Front Panel
3
1
6
9
11
13
10
12
14
8
2
4
5
7
18
15
19
17
Figure 2-12: Micro Base Station Front Panel
Table 2-17: Micro Base Station Connectors
Name
Connector
Functionality
DATA (5)
10/100Base-T (RJ-45)
with 2 embedded LEDs.
Connection to the backbone. Cable
connection to a hub/switch/router:
Straight
MGMT (6)
10/100Base-T (RJ-45)
with 2 embedded LEDs.
Connection to OOB management.
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
Cable connection to a hub/switch/router:
Straight
MON (7)
3-pin low profile jack
Access for debugging and configuration
using the Monitor program.
ALRM IN (9)
9-pin micro D-Type jack
Not used currently. Connections to
external alarm indicators
(3 alarm inputs, NC or NO)
ALRM OUT (10)
9-pin micro D-Type jack
Not used currently. Connections for
activation of external devices (4 dry
contact pairs)
ODU 1 (15),
ODU 2 (19)
2 x TNC jacks
IF connection to AU-ODU. In the current
release only ODU 1 is used.
BreezeMAX System Manual
61
Chapter 2 - Installation
Table 2-18: Micro Base Station LEDs
Name
Description
PWR (1)
Power indication
Functionality
Off – Micro Base Station is not
powered
Red – Input power failure
Green – Micro Base Station power is
OK
ALRM (2)
Micro Base Station
alarm indication
Off – No Micro Base Station alarm
SP (3)
Spare
Not Used
EXT ALRM (4)
External alarm
indication
Red – External alarm (received via the
ALRM IN port). Not applicable in the
current release.
WACT (11)
IDU transmission
Off – No IDU transmission
indication
Green – IDU transmission OK
Wireless link status
indication
Off – No SU is associated
ODU 1 PWR (13),
IDU to ODU Power
Off – No IDU to ODU power output
ODU 2 PWR (18)
Indication
Red – IDU to ODU power output failed
WLINK (12)
Red – Micro Base Station failure
Green – At least one SU is associated
Green – IDU to ODU power output OK
ODU 1 ALRM (14),
ODU 2 ALRM (17)
IDU-ODU
communication status
Off – IDU-ODU communication OK
Red - IDU-ODU communication failure
BreezeMAX System Manual
62
Installing the Micro Base Station Equipment
2.3.2.1
Preparing a Power Cable (DC model)
A 2.5m DC power cable is supplied with each chassis. Additional DC cables can
be ordered from Alvarion. If necessary, use the following instruction to prepare a
DC cable.
To prepare the power cable:
1
Use a cable capable of supporting a current of at least 10A. Use a cable with 2
x 10AWG (or thicker) wires for the power plus an additional 10AWG to 20AWG
ground wire.
2
The matching power connector to be used is Amphenol D-type power P/N
177TWA/3W3/SP3Y with high power socket contacts P/N 17DM53744-1.
3
Connect the cable to the power connector as follows:
Pin 1 (RTN): Red (10 AWG min wire)
Pin 2 (–48V): Black (10 AWG min wire)
Pin 3 (
4
2.3.3
): Ground (shield) (10AWG-20AWG wire)
Attach suitable terminal rings to the side that connects to the power source.
Installing the Micro Base Station Unit
The indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location
where the IF cable(s) enters the building. The location of the indoor equipment
should take into account its connection to the power source and to the base
station networking equipment.
To install the Micro Base Station:
1
Place the unit on a shelf/desk or install it in a 19” cabinet. For installation in
a 21” cabinet, attach suitable ETSI rack adapters to the chassis.
2
Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw located on the
rear panel of the unit (marked ) and firmly tighten the grounding screw.
Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground (earth)
connection or to the cabinet, if applicable.
3
Connect the DATA port to the backbone data equipment (use a straight
Ethernet cable to connect to a hub/switch/router). The maximum length of
the Ethernet cable is 100m.
BreezeMAX System Manual
63
Chapter 2 - Installation
4
If the MGMT port will be used for remote management, connect the it to the
appropriate data equipment (use a straight Ethernet cable to connect to a
hub/switch/router). The maximum length of the Ethernet cable is 100m.
5
For an AC model: Connect the power cord to the unit's AC socket, located on
the rear panel. Connect the other end of the power cord to the AC mains. The
unit can operate with AC mains of 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz.
NOTE
The color codes of the power cable are as follows:
Brown
Phase
Blue
Neutral
Yellow/Green
Ground
~
0
6
For a DC model: Connect the power cord to the unit's DC socket, located on
the rear panel. Connect the other end of the power cord to the -48 VDC power
source.
7
Connect the IF cable (already connected at the other end to the AU-ODU) to
the ODU 1 connector. To avoid transmissions at undesired frequencies, verify
that the frequency and bandwidth parameters are properly configured before
connecting the IF cables.
BreezeMAX System Manual
64
Installing the CPE-IDU-1D Indoor Unit
2.4
Installing the CPE-IDU-1D Indoor Unit
2.4.1
Installation Requirements
2.4.1.1
Packing List
BMAX-CPE-IDU-1D
Wall mounting kit
Mains power cord
2.4.1.2
Additional Installation Requirements
Ethernet cable(s): a crossed cable if connecting to a hub/switch and a straight
cable if connecting directly to a PC Network Interface Card (NIC).
NOTE
The length of the Ethernet cable connecting CPE-IDU-1D to the user’s equipment, together with the
length of the IDU-ODU cable, should not exceed 100 meters.
Mains plug adapter or termination plug (if the power plug on the supplied AC
power cord does not fit local power outlets).
Portable PC with an Ethernet card and a crossed Ethernet cable for
configuring parameters using Telnet. TFTP server SW is required for
downloading SW versions.
Other installation tools and materials (a drill for wall-mounting the unit,
means for securing cables to walls, etc.)
BreezeMAX System Manual
65
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.4.2
Introduction
The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf. Alternatively, it may be wallmounted. The drilling template included with the unit can be used to facilitate
the wall mounting process.
2.4.2.1
CPE IDU-1D Connectors and LEDs
Figure 2-13: CPE-IDU-1D Front Panel
1
2 3
4
Figure 2-14: CPE-IDU-1D 3D View
BreezeMAX System Manual
66
Installing the CPE-IDU-1D Indoor Unit
Table 2-19: CPE-IDU-1D Connectors
Name
Connector
Functionality
ETHERNET (4)
(on the side panel)
10/100Base-T (RJ-45)
with 2 embedded LEDs.
Connection to the user’s LAN/PC
Cable connection to a
hub/switch/router: Crossed
Cable connection to a PC: Straight
RADIO
10/100Base-T (RJ-45)
Connection to the ODU
3-pin AC
Mains power connection
(on the front panel)
POWER
(on the bottom panel)
Table 2-20: CPE-IDU-1D LEDs
Name
Description
POWER (3)
Power Indication
Functionality
Off – IDU is not powered or power failed
Green – IDU power is OK
ETH (2)
Ethernet link status
(Ethernet integrity)
Off – No Ethernet connectivity has been
detected between the outdoor unit and the
device connected to the indoor unit.
Green – Ethernet connectivity has been
detected between the outdoor unit and the
device connected to the indoor unit.
WIRELESS (1)
Wireless link status
Off – SU is not associated with an AU/µBST
Green – SU is connected with an AU/µBST
2.4.3
SU-IDU Installation
To install the SU-IDU:
1
It is assumed that the IDU-ODU cable is already connected to the ODU (refer
to to Connecting the SU's IDU-ODU Cable on page 42). Assemble an RJ-45
connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the IDU-ODU cable.
Refer to Appendix A for instructions on preparing the cable.
BreezeMAX System Manual
67
Chapter 2 - Installation
2
Connect the IDU-ODU cable to the RADIO connector. The RADIO connector in
the CPE-IDU-1D is located on the front panel as shown in Figure 2-13.
CAUTION
Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port. The RADIO port supplies DC power to the
ODU, and this may harm other equipment connected to it.
3
Connect the power cord to the unit’s AC socket, located on the rear panel.
Connect the other end of the power cord to the AC mains after verifying that
the unit is rated for the voltage in the country of use; the AC range is
indicated on the back side of the CPE-IDU-1D.
NOTE
The color codes of the power cable are as follows:
Brown
Phase
~
Blue
Neutral
0
Yellow/Green
Ground
4
Verify that the POWER LED located on the front panel is lit, indicating that
the unit is supplying power to the radio port.
5
Configure the basic parameters and align the antenna as described in the
applicable sections of Chapter 3 – Commissioning.
6
Connect the 10/100 Base-T ETHERNET connector(s) to the data equipment.
The cable connection should be a crossed Ethernet if connecting to a
hub/switch and a straight cable if connecting directly to a PC Network
Interface Card (NIC).
NOTE
The length of the Ethernet cable connecting CPE-IDU-1D to the user’s equipment, together with the
length of the IDU-ODU cable, should not exceed 100 meters.
7
Verify proper operation as described in the applicable section of Chapter 3 –
Commissioning.
BreezeMAX System Manual
68
3
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
In This Chapter:
Base Station and Micro Base Station Commissioning
Configuring Basic Parameters of Base Station and Micro Base Station,
page 70
Operation Verification – Base Station and Micro Base Station, page 72
SU Commissioning
Configuring Basic Parameters in SUs, page 77
Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna, page 79
Operation Verification - SU, page 80
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
3.1
Base Station and Micro Base Station
Commissioning
3.1.1
Configuring Basic Parameters of Base Station
and Micro Base Station
After completing the installation process, as described in the preceding chapter,
some basic parameters must be configured using the Monitor application via the
MON port of the NPU/Micro Base Station. These parameters are necessary to
enable remote management using SNMP or Telnet.
The basic parameters are listed in Table 3-1. Refer to Chapter 4 – Operation and
Administration for detailed information on the applicable parameters.
Table 3-1: Basic NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters
Management Option
MGMT port
Parameters
Management Port IP address
Management Port Subnet Mask
Management Port Gateway
Management Port Destination Subnet
Management Port Destination Subnet Mask
Management Port Auto Negotiation Option (µBST)
Management Port Speed and Duplex (µBST, if Auto
Negotiation Option is disabled)
DATA port
Data Port IP address
Data Port Subnet Mask
Data Port Gateway
Data Port Management VLAN ID
Data Port Speed (NPU)
Data Port Auto Negotiation Option (µBST)
Data Port Speed and Duplex (µBST, if Auto Negotiation
Option is disabled)
Authorized Managers
IP Address
(per manager)
Send Traps
Read Community
Write Community
70
BreezeMAX System Manual
Base Station and Micro Base Station Commissioning
The following are the guidelines for configuring the basic parameters:
All parameters of both ports should be configured. Otherwise, default values
shall be used.
If remote OOB management via a router connected to the MGMT port is used,
the parameters should be configured to ensure different subnets for the Data
port, the Management port (local OOB management) and the Management
Port Destination. The Management Port Destination Subnet is the subnet
behind a router connected to the MGMT port.
Authorized Manager(s) must be configured properly to enable remote
management using AlvariSTAR (or another SNMP based application).
Once the basic parameters have been configured, additional parameters and
services can be remotely configured using either SNMP management or the
Monitor application via Telnet. Alternatively, it is possible to continue the
configuration process using the Monitor application via the MON port.
Refer to Chapter 4 – Operation and Administration for information on how to
access the Monitor application either via the MON port or via Telnet and how to
use it.
NOTE
The default password is “admin”.
BreezeMAX System Manual
71
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
3.1.2
Operation Verification – Base Station and
Micro Base Station
The following sections describe how to verify the correct functioning of the
Outdoor Units, Indoor Units, Ethernet connection and data connectivity.
3.1.2.1
AU–ODU LEDs
To verify the correct operation of the AU–ODU, examine the LED indicators
located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit.
The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications.
NOTE
Verifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs, as described below, is only
possible after the configuration of basic parameters has been completed.
Table 3-2: AU-ODU LEDs
Name
Description
PWR
Power indication
Functionality
Off – ODU is not powered
Green – ODU power is OK
ALARM
Not Used
ETH
(WLNK)
Wireless link status
indication
72
(Red – blinks shortly during ODU power up)
Off – No SU is associated
Green – At least one SU is associated
BreezeMAX System Manual
Base Station and Micro Base Station Commissioning
3.1.2.2
Base Station LEDs
To verify the correct operation of the Base Station equipment, examine the LED
indicators located on the front panels of the modules. The following tables list the
LEDs of the Base Station modules and their associated indications.
Table 3-3: AU-IDU LEDs
Name
Description
PWR
Power indication
Functionality
Off – AU-IDU is not powered
Red – AU-IDU power supply failed (low
power)
Green – AU-IDU power is OK
ALARM
Alarm indication
Off – AU-IDU is OK
Red – AU-IDU failure
WLINK
WACT
Wireless link status
Off – No SU is associated
indication
Green – At least one SU is associated
IDU transmission
indication
Off – No IDU transmission
SP
Spare
IP
IP activity indication
Green – IDU transmission OK
Not Used
Off – No downlink (AU to SU) IP
activity
Green (blinking) – Downlink (AU to SU)
IP activity
ODU1/ODU2 PWR
IDU to ODU Power
Indication
Off – No IDU to ODU power output
Red – IDU to ODU power output failed
Green – IDU to ODU power output OK
ODU1/ODU2 ALRM
Off – IDU-ODU communication OK
Red - IDU-ODU communication failure
BreezeMAX System Manual
73
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
Table 3-4: NPU LEDs
Name
Description
PWR
Power indication
Functionality
Off – NPU is not powered
Red – NPU power failure
Green – NPU power is OK
ALRM
NPU Alarm indication
Off – NPU is OK
Red – NPU failure
BST ALRM
Base Station chassis
alarm indication
EXT ALRM
External alarm
indication
Off – All Base Station modules are OK
Red – Failure in one (or more) Base
Station modules
Off – No alarm received via the AL IN
connector
Red – Alarm received via the AL IN
connector
MASTER
GPS/SYNC
74
Master/Slave
(primary/secondary)
operation indication
Off – Secondary NPU (backup)
GPS/IF clock
synchronization
functionality indication
Off – GPS/IF clock synchronization is
disabled
Green – Primary NPU
Green – GPS/IF clock synchronization
is enabled
BreezeMAX System Manual
Base Station and Micro Base Station Commissioning
Table 3-5: PIU LEDs
LED Status
Description
PWR
MASTER
Off
Off
Chassis is not connected to power.
Red
Off
Power is not connected or power input is out of range or PIU
card is damaged. Chassis is powered by the redundant PIU.
Red
Green
Power input is out of range or PIU card damaged. Chassis is
powered by the PIU
Green
Off
Power to PIU is OK. PIU is in redundant mode and the chassis
is powered from the other PIU.
Green
Green
Power to PIU is OK. The chassis is powered from the PIU.
Table 3-6: PSU LEDs
LED Status
Description
PWR
ALRM
Off
Off
No power or fatal damage
Off
Red
Power input is out of range or PSU is damaged or PSU is
inhibited by NPU.
Green
Off
Power is OK and PSU operates properly.
Table 3-7: AVU LEDs
LED Status
Description
PWR
ALRM
Off
Off
No 5V power input
Red
Red
12V power failed
Green
Red
One or more fans have failed
Green
Off
AVU operates properly
BreezeMAX System Manual
75
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
3.1.2.3
Micro Base Station LEDs
To verify the correct operation of the Micro Base Station equipment, examine the
LED indicators located on the front panel of the unit. The following table lists the
LEDs of the Micro Base Station and their associated indications.
Table 3-8: Micro Base Station LEDs
Name
Description
PWR
Power indication
Functionality
Off – Micro Base Station is not
powered
Red – Input power failure
Green – Micro Base Station power is
OK
ALRM
Micro Base Station alarm
indication
Off –Micro Base Station is OK
SP
Spare
Not Used
EXT ALRM
External alarm indication
Red – External alarm (received via the
ALRM IN port). Not applicable in the
current release.
WACT
IDU transmission indication
Red – Micro Base Station failure
Off – No IDU transmission
Green – IDU transmission OK
Wireless link status
indication
Off – No SU is associated
ODU1/ODU2
IDU to ODU Power
Off – No IDU to ODU power output
PWR
Indication
Red – IDU to ODU power output failed
WLINK
Green – At least one SU is associated
Green – IDU to ODU power output OK
ODU1/ODU2
ALRM
3.1.2.4
IDU-ODU communication
status
Off – IDU-ODU communication OK
Red - IDU-ODU communication failure
Verifying the Ethernet Connection
Once you have connected the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the Ethernet
Integrity Indicator, which is the yellow LED embedded in the DATA port
connector, is on. This indicates that the unit is connected to an Ethernet
segment. The Ethernet Activity Indicator, which is the green embedded LED,
should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the DATA port.
76
BreezeMAX System Manual
SU Commissioning
3.2
SU Commissioning
3.2.1
Configuring Basic Parameters in SUs
After completing the installation process, as described in the preceding chapter,
the basic parameters must be configured to ensure that the unit operates
correctly and can communicate with the AU. Once the basic parameters have
been configured, additional parameters can be remotely configured via the
wireless link.
To configure the SU’s basic parameters:
1
Connect a PC to the Ethernet port, using a crossed cable.
2
Configure the PC's IP parameters to enable connectivity with the unit. The IP
address of the Monitor program port is 192.168.254.251. The Subnet Mask is
255.255.255.0. The recommended IP address for the PC is 192.168.254.250,
as this is also the default TFTP Sever IP Address (required for downloading SW
versions and for downloading/uploading configuration files)
3
Run the Telnet program connecting to 192.168.254.251. The Enter the
passwod prompt is displayed. Enter the password and press the Enter key.
NOTE
The default password is “installer”.
4
The Main menu of the SU Installer Monitor program is displayed, enabling
you to access the required parameters configuration and performance
monitoring options. Refer to Appendix B for instructions on using the SU
Installer Monitor program and detailed information on the various parameters
and other features supported by the program.
5
Configure the basic parameters listed in Table 3-9 on page 78.
6
Reset the unit (use the Reset option in the Unit Control menu) to apply the
new settings and enable synchronization with the AU.
BreezeMAX System Manual
77
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
Table 3-9: SU’s Basic Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Ethernet Port Operation Mode
Auto Negotiation
Comment
Common Name
Must be supplied by
administration to ensure
uniqueness in the entire
network
Organization Name
Optional – according to
administrator policy.
Address
Optional– according to
administrator policy.
Country Code
Optional– according to
administrator policy.
Operator ID
186.190.0
Cell ID
0.0
Sector ID
0
Base Sector ID Mask
255.255.255.0
Bandwidth
3.5 MHz
Uplink (Tx) Frequency
3451.75 MHz
NOTE
Some parameters are changed to their new values only after reset (refer to Appendix B for more
details). Once the basic parameters are configured, the unit should be reset in order to activate the
new configuration.
78
BreezeMAX System Manual
SU Commissioning
3.2.2
Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna
The LINK QUALITY bar display is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit.
LED 1 (WLNK) indicates that the wireless link is active, and is lit when the SU
has completed the Network Entry process. LEDs 2 to 9 indicate the quality of the
received signal. The higher the number of LEDs that are on, the better the quality
of the received signal.
The link quality can be estimated more accurately using the Link Quality Display
option in the SU Installer Monitor program. Refer to Start Link Quality Display on
page 217 for more details on this option.
This section describes how to align the Subscriber Unit antenna using the LINK
QUALITY bar display or the Start Link Quality Display option of the Monitor
program.
To align the Subscriber Unit antenna:
1
Point the antenna towards the general direction of the Base Station.
2
Verify that the power indication of the unit is on.
3
Verify that at least one LED (LED 2) of the LINK QUALITY bar display is on,
indicating that the unit is synchronized with the AU. If the SU is not
synchronized with the AU, ensure that all parameters are configured properly.
If the unit is still not synchronized with the AU, improve the quality of the link
by changing the direction of the antenna or by placing the antenna at a higher
or alternate location.
4
Rotate the antenna until the maximum Link Quality reading is achieved. If
you encounter prolonged difficulty in achieving the expected link quality, try
to improve the reception quality by placing the antenna at a higher point or in
an alternate location.
NOTE
Ensure that the front of the antenna is always facing the Base Station. However, in certain
conditions, such as when the line of site to the Base Station is hampered, better reception may be
achieved using a reflected signal. In this case, the antenna is not necessarily directed toward the
Base Station.
5
Secure the unit firmly to the pole.
CAUTION
In some cases, the antenna may need to be tilted to ensure that the level at which the SU receives
transmissions from the AU (and vice versa) is not too high. When all LINK QUALITY LEDS are on,
including LED 10. This indicates that the received signal level is too high (saturation). This must be
avoided, preferably by up-tilting the antenna. As a rule of thumb, if the SU is located at a distance
of less than 300 meters from the AU, it is recommended to up-tilt the antenna by approximately 10°
to 15°.
BreezeMAX System Manual
79
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
3.2.3
Operation Verification - SU
The following sections describe how to verify the correct functioning of the
Outdoor Units, Indoor Units, Ethernet connection and data connectivity.
3.2.3.1
CPE-IDU-1D LEDS
Table 3-10: CPE-IDU-1D LEDs
Name
Description
POWER
Power Indication
Functionality
Off – IDU is not powered or power failed
Green – IDU power is OK
ETH
Ethernet link status
(Ethernet integrity)
Off – No Ethernet connectivity has been
detected between the outdoor unit and the
device connected to the indoor unit.
Green – Ethernet connectivity has been
detected between the outdoor unit and the
device connected to the indoor unit.
WIRELESS
Wireless link status
Off – SU is not associated with an AU/µBST
Green – SU is connected with an AU/µBST
80
BreezeMAX System Manual
SU Commissioning
3.2.3.2
SU – ODU LEDs
To verify the correct operation of the SU – ODU, examine the LED indicators
located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit.
The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications.
NOTE
Verifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs, as described below, is only
possible after the configuration and alignment processes are completed.
Table 3-11: SU-ODU LEDs
Name
Description
PWR
Power indication
Functionality
Off – ODU is not powered
Green – ODU power is OK
ALARM
Alarm indication
Off – ODU is OK, diagnostic test passed
Red – ODU failure
ETH
Ethernet link status
indication
(Ethernet integrity)
Off – No Ethernet connectivity has been
detected between the outdoor unit and the
device connected to the indoor unit.
Green– Ethernet connectivity has been
detected between the outdoor unit and the
device connected to the indoor unit
LINK QUALITY
bar display
Wireless link status
and signal quality
Indication
See Table 3-12.
BreezeMAX System Manual
81
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
Table 3-12: SU-ODU LINK QUALITY Bar LEDs Functionality
Bar LEDs
SNR
LED 1 (orange) is On
The SU is connected with and receives services from
AU/µBST (Network Entry completed)
LED 2 (green) is On
5dB ≤ SNR < 10dB
LEDs 2-3 (green) are On
10dB ≤ SNR < 15dB
LEDs 2-4 (green) are On
15dB ≤ SNR < 20dB
LEDs 2-5 (green) are On
20dB ≤ SNR < 24dB
LEDs 2-6 (green) are On
SNR ≥ 24 and RSSI < -75
LEDs 2-7 (green) are On
SNR ≥ 24 and RSSI ≥ -75
LEDs 2-8 (green) are On
SNR ≥ 24 and RSSI ≥ -70
LEDs 2-9 (green) are On
SNR ≥ 24 and RSSI ≥ -60
LEDs 2-9 (green) and 10 (red)
RSSI ≥ -20 (saturation)
are On
3.2.3.3
Verifying Data Connectivity
To verify data connectivity, from the end-user’s PC or from a portable PC
connected to the unit, ping a known device in the network, or try to connect to
the Internet. For units with multiple LAN ports, verify proper operation for each of
the ports.
82
BreezeMAX System Manual
4
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
In This Chapter:
BreezeMAX System Management, page 84
The Monitor Program, page 85
The Micro Base Station’s Main Menu, page 88
Micro Base Station Menu, page 89
The NPU’s Main Menu, page 95
Base Station Menu, page 97
NPU Menu, page 102
AU Menu, page 115
SU Menu, page 132
Services Menu, page 150
NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters Summary, page 177
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.1
BreezeMAX System Management
All BreezeMAX system components associated with a modular Base Station are
managed via the Base Station’s NPU module. The other system components (AUs
and SUs) are not accessed directly: each configuration change or status enquiry
is sent to the NPU that communicates with other system components. This is true
also for a Micro Base station, where all the associated SUs are managed indirectly
via the Micro Base Station (µBST).
NOTE
The SU can also be managed directly from its Ethernet port using the Installer Monitor program.
This option is available to support the installation process and enable special tests and
performance monitoring at the SU’s site.
The following management options are available:
SNMP based management using AlvariSTAR (or another network management
system customized to support management of BreezeMAX)
Using Telnet to access the embedded Monitor application.
Accessing the embedded Monitor application locally via the MON port.
Two management access methods are available to support management using
SNMP and/or Telnet:
Out-Of-Band (OOB) management via the dedicated MGMT port.
In-Band (IB) management via the DATA port.
Typically, BreezeMAX systems will be managed using AlvariSTAR or another
SNMP based network management system.
This chapter describes how to manage the system using the Monitor application.
For information on managing the system using AlvariSTAR refer to the Applicable
AlvariSTAR documentation.
NOTE
To enable remote management (using SNMP and/or Telnet), the parameters of the applicable port
(MGMT and/or DATA) must first be configured via the MON port. For details on the applicable
parameters refer to Configuration (NPU) on page 107.
BreezeMAX System Manual
84
The Monitor Program
4.2
The Monitor Program
4.2.1
Accessing the Monitor Program
To access the Monitor program via the MON connector:
Use the Monitor cable to connect the MON connector of the NPU/Micro Base
1
Station to the COM port of your ASCII ANSI terminal or PC. The COM port
connector on the Monitor cable is a 9-pin D-type plug.
2
Run a terminal emulation program, such as HyperTerminal™.
3
Set the communication parameters as shown in the following table:
Table 4-1: COM Port Configuration
Parameter
Value
Baud Rate
9600
Data Bits
8
Stop Bits
1
Parity
None
Flow Control
Xon/Xoff
Port
Connected COM port
4
The passwod prompt is displayed. Enter the password and press the Enter
key to get to the Main menu.
NOTE
The default password is “admin”.
To access the Monitor program using Telnet:
1
The PC used for accessing the Monitor program should be configured
according to the parameters configured for the applicable port (MGMT or
DATA port).
2
If you connect directly to the MGMT or DATA port, use a crossed Ethernet
cable.
3
Run the Telnet program connecting to the IP address of the connected port.
BreezeMAX System Manual
85
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4
The Enter the passwod message is displayed. Enter the password and press
the Enter key to get to the Main menu.
NOTE
If you forgot the password, type “help” to receive a challenge string consisting of 24 characters.
Contact Alvarion’s Customer Service and provide the challenge string (after user identification) to
receive a temporary password. You can use this password only once to enter the program. The
password must be changed during the session to a different “permanent” password. The
administrator should be notified of this new password. Five consecutive errors in entering the
temporary password will invalidate it. In this case, repeat this procedure to receive a new challenge
string for a new temporary password.
4.2.2
Using the Monitor Program
This section describes the Monitor program structure and navigation rules.
Each menu or submenu specifies the unit type (BreezeMAX NPU or µBST), the
running SW version and a description of the menu. When accessing the
Monitor program using Telnet, the IP address of the applicable port is
displayed after the unit type.
Each menu or submenu displays a list of numbered options. To access an
option, enter the number of the required option at the > prompt and press the
Enter key.
At any point in the program, you can use the Esc key to return to the previous
menu (one level up) without applying any change.
The first selectable item in most menus is the Show option, enabling to view
the current configuration of the applicable parameters. For some menus some
additional status information is displayed.
For certain parameters, an updated value is applied only after reset or after
entering a specific command. In these parameters, the configured value may
differ from the actual value. If the configured value differs from the actual
value both values will be displayed, where the first one is the configured value
and the second is the actual value. For example: “Bandwidth (MHz): 1.75, 3.5”
means that the configured bandwidth, to be applied after the next reset, is
1.75 MHz, and the current actual bandwidth is 3.5 MHz.
For certain parameters the actual values may not be available (such as when
pre-configuring an AU that is not yet installed). For these parameters a value
of NA (Not Available) will be displayed.
The Update/Add options will display all applicable parameters line by line,
allowing to conveniently edit all of them. The current value is displayed for
each parameter. To keep the current value - press Enter. To change it - enter
a new value and press Enter.
BreezeMAX System Manual
86
The Monitor Program
Press the Tab key for context sensitive help text (where applicable).
If an erroneous value was entered - the reason of the error or help text will be
displayed, and the parameter entry text will be displayed again.
Many menus include a Select By option, enabling to get a sub-menu for a
selected entity according to the selection criteria.
If the Monitor program is not used for 10 minutes, the session will be
automatically terminated.
Select the Exit option in the Main menu to exit the program and terminate the
session.
BreezeMAX System Manual
87
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.3
The Micro Base Station’s Main Menu
The Main menu of the Micro Base Station (µBST) Monitor program includes the
following options:
BreezeMAX uBST
SW Version 1.0.2
Main Menu
==========
1 – Micro Base Station
2 - SU
3 - Services
X - Exit
>
Figure 4-1: Micro Base Station Monitor’s Main Menu
Following is a description of the menu items and the options available in each of
the menu items. Most of the features, parameters and options available in the
Micro Base Station menus are identical or very similar to those of the NPU,
described in detail in the following sections. In order to avoid duplication of
information, references are made to the relevant sections of the NPU Monitor
description.
4.3.1
Micro Base Station Menu
The Micro Base Station menu enables viewing general unit’s details, viewing and
configuring unit’s parameters, managing the SW versions and viewing ports
traffic counters. For more details refer to Micro Base Station Menu on page 89.
4.3.2
SU Menu
The SU menu enables viewing summary information of all relevant SUs and
configuring the parameters of a selected SU. It also enables managing the
selected SU’s SW versions and viewing its current status, configuration and
performance information. For more details refer to SU Menu on page 132.
4.3.3
Services Menu
The Service menu enables viewing, updating and adding service profiles and
subscribers, and allocating service profiles to subscribers. For more details refer
to Services Menu on page 150.
4.3.4
Exit
Select the Exit option to exit the Monitor program and terminate the Telnet
session.
BreezeMAX System Manual
88
Micro Base Station Menu
4.4
Micro Base Station Menu
The Micro Base Station menu includes the following options:
Show
Unit Control
Configuration
Alarms and Traps
Performance Monitoring
4.4.1
Show
Select this option to view general unit’s details as well as the current
value/selected option of configurable parameters.
Unit Details
Serial Number
IDU Serial Number
IDU Main Card HW Revision
IDU Main Card HW Configuration
IDU IF Card HW Revision
IDU IF Card HW Configuration
IDU Boot Version
IDU Temperature (Celsius)
ODU Serial Number
ODU HW Revision
ODU HW Configuration
BreezeMAX System Manual
89
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
ODU HC08 Version
ODU CPLD Version
ODU Temperature (Celsius)
Status
SW Versions
Main SW File
Main SW Version
Shadow SW File
Shadow SW Version
Running From (Main or Shadow)
Boot SW Version
For more details refer to SW Version Control (NPU) on page 105.
General Parameters
Device Name
Device Location
For details refer to Configuration (Base Station) on page 98.
Management Port Configuration
Management Port MAC Address
Management Port IP Address
Management Port Subnet Mask
Management Port Gateway
Management Port Dest Subnet
Management Port Dest Subnet Mask
BreezeMAX System Manual
90
Micro Base Station Menu
Management Port Auto Negotiation
Management Port Speed and Duplex
Management Port Link Status (Up or Down)
For details refer to Management Port Parameters on page 108.
Data Port Configuration
Data Port MAC Address
Data Port IP Address
Data Port Subnet Mask
Data Port Gateway
Data Port Management VLAN
Data Port Auto Negotiation
Data Port Speed and Duplex
Data Port Link Status (Up or Down)
For details refer to Data Port Parameters on page 110.
Authorized Managers (per manager)
IP Address
Send Traps
Read Community
Write Community
For details refer to Authorized Managers on page 111.
Bridge
Bridge Aging Time
For details refer to Bridge on page 112.
BreezeMAX System Manual
91
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
MAC Parameters
Base Station ID
ARQ Enable/Disable
Maximum Cell Radius (km)
For details refer to MAC Parameters (AU) on page 121.
Phy Parameters
Frequency Band
Bandwidth (MHz)
Downlink (Tx) Frequency (MHz)
Tx Power (dBm)
For details refer to Phy Parameters (AU) on page 122.
Multirate Parameters
Multirate Enable/Disable
Uplink Basic Rate
Downlink Basic Rate
For details refer to Multirate Parameters (AU) on page 124.
ATPC Parameters
ATPC Enable/Disable
Optimal Uplink RSSI (dBm)
For details refer to ATPC Parameters (AU) on page 126.
Voice Parameters:
Maximum Number of Voice Calls
For details refer to Voice Parameters (AU) on page 127.
BreezeMAX System Manual
92
Micro Base Station Menu
4.4.2
Unit Control
The Unit Control menu enables changing the access password and the Monitor
Inactivity Timeout, resetting the unit, setting factory defaults, managing the SW
versions of the unit and creating a backup file.
The Unit Control menu includes the following options:
Change Password
Reset
Set Factory Defaults
SW Versions Control
Backup
Monitor Inactivity Timeout
The features and options available in the Unit Control menu of the Micro Base
Station are identical to those available in the Unit Control menu of the NPU. For
more details refer to Unit Control (NPU) on page 104.
4.4.3
Configuration
The Configuration menu of the Micro Base Station enables to configure various
parameters. The parameters available in the Configuration menu of the Micro
Base Station are very similar to those available in the Configuration>Update
options of the Base Station, NPU and AU menus of the NPU Monitor.
The Configuration menu of the Micro Base Station includes the following options:
General Parameters (for details refer to Configuration (Base Station) on page
98).
Management Port (for details refer to Management Port Parameters on page
108).
Data Port (for details refer to Data Port Parameters on page 110).
Authorized Managers (for details refer to Authorized Managers on page 111).
Bridge (for details refer to Bridge on page 112)
MAC (for details refer to MAC Parameters (AU) on page 121).
BreezeMAX System Manual
93
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Phy (for details refer to Phy Parameters (AU) on page 122).
Multirate (for details refer to Multirate Parameters (AU) on page
124).
ATPC (for details refer to ATPC Parameters (AU) on page 126).
Voice Parameters (for details refer to Voice Parameters (AU) on page 127).
4.4.4
Alarms and Traps
The Alarms and Traps menu enables viewing the active alarms or the traps log,
filtering the displayed traps and enabling/disabling traps. For details refer to
Alarms and Traps (Base Station) on page 98.
4.4.5
Performance Monitoring
The Performance Monitoring menu enables to view and reset the µBST Ethernet
Ports and Wireless Port counters. It also enables to initiate and manage a BER
test on the link with a specific SU, and to view or reset the Burst Error Rate
counters for the downlink to a selected SU. The Performance Monitoring
submenu includes the following options:
Ports Counters:
Management Port: The functionality is the same as the Management Port
counters in the NPU. For details refer to Management Port Counters (NPU)
on page 114.
Data and Wireless Ports: The functionality is the same as for the Ethernet
and Wireless Ports counters in the AU. For details refer to Ports Counters
(AU) on page 127.
BER Test: The functionality is the same as for the BER Test option in the AU.
For details refer to BER Test (AU) on page 130.
Burst Error Rate Counters: The functionality is the same as for the Burst
Error Rate Counters option in the AU. For details refer to Burst Error Rate
Counters (AU) on page 131.
BreezeMAX System Manual
94
The NPU’s Main Menu
4.5
The NPU’s Main Menu
The Main menu of the NPU Monitor program includes the following options:
BreezeMAX NPU [192.168.254.10]
SW Version 1.5.1
Main Menu
==========
1 – Base Station
2 - NPU
3 - AU
4 - SU
5 - Services
X - Exit
>
Figure 4-2: NPU Monitor’s Main Menu
4.5.1
Base Station Menu
The Base Station menu enables to view general base station status information,
to configure general base station parameters, and to view active alarms or traps
log. For details refer to Base Station Menu on page 97.
4.5.2
NPU Menu
The NPU menu enables configuring the NPU’s DATA and MGMT ports, defining
authorized managers, managing the NPU’s SW versions and viewing current
status and configurations. For details refer to NPU Menu on page 102.
4.5.3
AU Menu
The AU menu enables configuring the MAC and Phy parameters of selected AUs,
including pre-configuration of AUs that are not yet installed. It also enables
managing AUs SW versions and viewing current status, configurations and
performance information. For details refer to AU Menu on page 115.
4.5.4
SU Menu
The SU menu enables viewing summary information of all relevant SUs and
configuring the parameters of a selected SU. It also enables managing the
selected SU’s SW versions and viewing its current status, configuration and
performance information. For details refer to SU Menu on page 132.
BreezeMAX System Manual
95
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.5.5
Services Menu
The Service menu enables viewing, updating and adding service profiles and
subscribers, and allocating service profiles to subscribers. For details refer to
Services Menu on page 150.
4.5.6
Exit
Select the Exit option to exit the Monitor program and terminate the Telnet
session.
BreezeMAX System Manual
96
Base Station Menu
4.6
Base Station Menu
The Base Station menu includes the following options:
Show
Configuration
Alarms and Traps
4.6.1
Show
Select this option to view the current value/selected option of configurable
parameters. Refer to Configuration (Base Station) on page 98 for more details on
these parameters. In addition, some general status information is displayed, as
follows:
Device Name
Device Location
Slots status, displaying for each slot (1-9) the following:
Installed module type (or “Not Installed” for an empty slot)
Fault status for an installed module
Fault status of the AVU module
PIU slots status, displaying for each PIU slot:
Mode: Master, Redundant or Not Installed
Fault Status
PSU slots table, displaying the status of each slot: Not installed, OK or Fault.
BreezeMAX System Manual
97
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
P
I
U
P
S
U
#1
#1
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
P
S
U
#3
P
I
U
P
S
U
P
S
U
#2
#2
#4
Figure 4-3: Base Station Chassis Slot Assignments
4.6.2
Configuration
Select this option to view or configure the general Base Station parameters:
4.6.2.1
Device Name
The Device Name parameter provides identification information for the base
station equipment.
The device name consists of up to 256 printable characters.
The default Device Name is a null string (empty).
4.6.2.2
Device Location
The Device Location parameter provides location information for the Base Station
equipment.
The location name consists of up to 256 printable characters.
The default Device Location is a null string (empty).
4.6.3
Alarms and Traps
The Alarms and Traps menu enables viewing the active alarms or the traps log,
filtering the displayed traps and enabling/disabling traps. The available options
are:
Show Active Alarms
Traps Display Filter
Show Traps Log
Trap Configuration
BreezeMAX System Manual
98
Base Station Menu
4.6.3.1
Show Active Alarms
Select to view the currently active alarms. For more details on active alarms refer
to Appendix D - Traps and Alarms.
4.6.3.2
Traps Display Filter
Select to view/update the filtering criteria for the Traps Log display. The
configurable filtering criteria are:
4.6.3.2.1
Minimum Severity
The Minimum Severity parameter enables defining the minimum severity filter.
Traps whose severity is below the defined severity will not be displayed.
The options are Critical, Major, Minor, Warning and Info.
The default is Info severity, which means that all the traps in the log will be
displayed.
4.6.3.2.2
Days
The Days parameter enables defining the period for which traps will be displayed.
The available options are from 1 to 31 days. Only traps that occurred within the
last N days, where N is the value selected for this parameter, will be displayed.
The default is 31 days.
4.6.3.3
Show Traps Log
Select to view the traps log. The traps will be displayed based on the filtering
criteria defined by the Minimum Severity and Days parameters in the Traps
Display Filtering option, up to a maximum of the last 1000 traps. For more
details refer to Appendix D - Traps and Alarms.
4.6.3.4
Trap Configuration
To support simple configuration of traps admin status (enable/disable), the traps
are grouped into two groups: Group A Traps and Group B Traps. The Trap
Configuration submenu enables viewing the admin status of each trap as well as
enabling/disabling the traps in each of the two groups. The available options are:
4.6.3.4.1
Show Traps Admin Status
Select this option to display the Traps Admin Status List. The list includes for
each trap the trap ID (Sequential Number), trap name and admin status
(Enabled/Disabled).
BreezeMAX System Manual
99
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.6.3.4.2
Trap Group Enable/Disable
This option allows selecting between Group A and Group B, followed by the
option to Enable or Disable the traps in the selected group.
The default for both groups is Enable.
Table 4-2: Group A Traps
Trap ID
Trap Name
1
ResetOn
2
DiagnosticsHwFaultOn
3
DiagnosticsHwFaultOff
6
AuNetworkEntryStatus
21
ShelfCardExtractionOn
22
ShelfCardInsertionOn
23
ShelfPeripheralEquipmentFaultOn
24
ShelfPeripheralEquipmentFaultOff
25
ShelfEnvParamFaultOn
26
helfEnvParamFaultOff
42
ParameterSetFailure
61
OduCrcErrorOn
62
OduCrcErrorOff
63
OduCommErrorOn
64
OduCommErrorOff
114
ServiceGeneralError
128
ColdStart
129
WarmStart
130
LinkDown
131
LinkUp
132
AuthenticationFailure
BreezeMAX System Manual
100
Base Station Menu
Table 4-3: Group B Traps
Trap ID
Trap Name
4
MonitorAccessOn
5
MonitorAccessOff
41
ConfigurationChanged
81
SuMaxTxPowerReached
82
SuMinTxPowerReached
83
SuNetworkEntryStatus
101
SwDownloadStart
102
SwDownloadEnd
103
SwDownloadError
104
SwSwitchFailed
105
SwSwitchSucceed
106
BERTestFinished
107
BERTestStarted
111
IServiceDown
112
ServiceUp
113
ServiceChanged
BreezeMAX System Manual
101
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.7
NPU Menu
The NPU menu includes the following options:
Show
Unit Control
Configuration
Performance Monitoring
Following is a detailed description of these options.
4.7.1
Show
Select this option to view the current value/selected option of configurable
parameters. Refer to Configuration (NPU) on page 107 for more details on these
parameters. In addition, some general status information is shown, as follows:
General Parameters:
Serial Number
HW Version
HW Configuration
Temperature (Celsius)
Management Port Parameters:
Management Port MAC Address
Management Port IP Address
Management Port Subnet Mask
Management Port Gateway
Management Port Dest Subnet
Management Port Dest Subnet Mask
BreezeMAX System Manual
102
NPU Menu
Management Port Status
Management Port Management Traffic (Enabled/Disabled)
Data Port Parameters:
Data Port MAC Address
Data Port IP Address
Data Port Subnet Mask
Data Port Gateway
Data Port Management VLAN
Data Port Speed
Data Port Status
Data Port Management Traffic (Enabled/Disabled)
Authorized Managers (per manager):
IP Address
Access Rights
Send Traps
Read Community
Write Community
Bridge Parameters:
Bridge Aging Time
SW Files and Versions:
Main SW File
Main SW Version
Shadow SW File
BreezeMAX System Manual
103
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Shadow SW Version
Running From: The currently running version (Main or Shadow)
Boot SW Version
4.7.2
Unit Control
The Unit Control menu of the NPU/ µBST enables changing the access password
and the Monitor Inactivity Timeout, resetting the NPU/ µBST, setting factory
defaults, managing the SW versions of the module and creating backup files.
The Unit Control menu includes the following options:
Change Password
Reset
Set Factory Defaults
SW Versions Control
Create Backup
Monitor Inactivity Timeout
4.7.2.1
Change Password
Select this option to change the password. You will be prompted to enter the new
password. After pressing enter, you will be prompted to re-enter the new
password.
NOTE
Notify the system administrator of the new password!
Valid passwords: Up to 16 printable characters, case sensitive.
The default password is admin.
4.7.2.2
Reset Unit
Select this option to reset the NPU/ µBST. To avoid unintentional reset, you will
be prompted to confirm the reset request. Changes to some of the configurable
parameters are applied only after reset. Refer to NPU/Micro Base Station
Parameters Summary on page 177 for information on which parameters are
changeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset.
BreezeMAX System Manual
104
NPU Menu
4.7.2.3
Set Factory Defaults
Select this option to set the Base Station and NPU (or the Micro Base Station)
parameters to their factory default values. Refer to NPU/Micro Base Station
Parameters Summary on page 177 for information on the factory default values of
these parameters. The parameters will revert to their default values after the next
reset.
NOTE
Setting the parameters of the NPU/ µBST to their default values will disable remote management of
the Base Station.
4.7.2.4
SW Version Control
The NPU/ µBST can contain two SW versions:
Main: Each time the NPU/ µBST resets it will reboot using the version defined
as Main.
Shadow: Normally the Shadow version is the backup version. Each time a
new SW File is downloaded to the NPU/ µBST, it will be stored as a Shadow
version, replacing the previous Shadow Version.
The typical process of upgrading to a new SW version includes the following
steps:
1
Download the new SW File to the NPU/ µBST. It will be stored as the Shadow
version.
2
Reset and run the module from its Shadow version. Note that at this stage,
after reset the unit will reboot from its previous Main version.
3
If you want to continue using the new version, swap the Shadow and Main
versions. The new version is now defined as Main, and will be used each time
the module reboots. The previous version is defined now as Shadow.
Each SW version includes two identifiers:
SW File, which is the name of the downloaded SW file. This name does not
necessarily include clear identification of the SW version number.
SW Version, which provides unambiguous identification of the SW version.
The SW Version Control submenu includes the following options:
Show versions
Run from Shadow
BreezeMAX System Manual
105
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Set as Main
4.7.2.4.1
Show Versions
Select this option to view the current available versions and the running version:
Main SW File
Main SW Version
Shadow SW File
Shadow SW Version
Running From: Main or Shadow
Boot SW Version
4.7.2.4.2
Run from Shadow
Select the Run from Shadow option to reset the NPU/ µBST and run the Shadow
version after power up. To avoid unintentional actions you will be prompted to
confirm the request.
4.7.2.4.3
Set as Main
When the NPU/ µBST is running the Shadow version (after selecting Reset and
Run from Shadow), it will boot from the Main version after the next reset. Select
the Set as Main option if you want to swap versions so that the running version
will become the Main version and will be the version to be used after reset. To
avoid unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request.
4.7.2.5
Create Backup
The Create Backup option enables creating backup files of the Base
Station/Micro Base station configuration. The backup file contains copies of all
the applicable configuration files and databases in the system.
The following backup file types can be created:
Full: The entire Base Station/Micro Base Station configuration (except to the
basic IP parameters of the MGMT and DATA ports - IP Address, Subnet Mask
and Default Gateway).
Profiles: All the profiles associated with services (Service Profiles, Forwarding
Rules, Priority Classifiers, QoS Profiles).
BreezeMAX System Manual
106
NPU Menu
Profiles and Services: All the profiles and configurations associated with
service (General Service parameters, Subscribers, Services, Service Profiles,
Forwarding Rules, Priority Classifiers, QoS Profiles)
Upon selecting the backup type option, you will be requested to confirm the
request. After confirmation, a message is displayed indicating that the backup file
creation is in process. Upon successful completion of the process, a completion
message will be displayed.
If a backup file of the same type already exists in the NPU/ µBST, you will be
asked whether to overwrite the existing file. If there was an error in the process of
creating a backup file, an error message will be displayed, specifying the reason.
To upload/download the Backup File:
After the backup file has been created, it can be uploaded using a DOS based
TFTP Client application to a target directory. To upload the file, use the
command:
tftp-i <Port IP address> get <file name> <destination address>.
The default file name is:
Full: backup.res.
Profiles: profiles.res
Profiles and Services: profiles_srvcs.res
The file is encrypted and cannot be edited. However, it can be downloaded to
other NPU(s)/ µBSTs using a DOS based TFTP Client application with the
command: tftp-i <Port IP address> put <file name>.
The target NPU/ µBST will decrypt the backup file, extract all the configuration
files and databases and will store them, replacing existing files/databases. The
NPU/ µBST should be reset to apply the downloaded configuration.
NOTE
To avoid loss of connectivity behind a router, the basic IP parameters of the MGMT and DATA
ports (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway) are not changed when loading a Full backup file
to the NPU/ µBST. The values of these parameters configured in the target NPU/ µBST before the
loading process, are maintained.
4.7.2.6
Monitor Inactivity Timeout
The Monitor Inactivity Timeout parameter determines the amount of inactive time
following which the unit automatically exits the Monitor program.
The time out duration can range from 1 to 60 minutes.
BreezeMAX System Manual
107
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
The default value is 10 minutes.
4.7.3
Configuration
The NPU Configuration menu, and the applicable options in the µBST
Configuration menu, enables viewing and updating parameters that define the
functionality of the MGMT and DATA ports, the properties of authorized
management stations and bridging functionality.
The following are the guidelines for configuring these parameters:
All IP parameters of both ports should be configured. Otherwise, default
values shall be used.
The Destination Subnet parameters of the MGMT port enable defining an
additional subnet of stations that can manage the device when connected via
a router to the MGMT port. If OOB management via a router connected to the
MGMT port is used, the parameters should be configured to ensure different
subnets for the Data port, the Management port and the Management Port
Destination Subnet.
Authorized Manager(s) must be configured properly to enable remote
management using AlvariSTAR (or another SNMP based application).
The NPU Configuration menu includes the following options:
Management Port
Data Port
Authorized Managers
Bridge
4.7.3.1
Management Port Parameters
These parameters define the IP parameters for the MGMT port, when this port is
used for Out-Of-Band (OOB) management.
The Ethernet interface of the MGMT port in the NPU operates using Auto
Negotiation, enabling communication at either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
The Ethernet interface of the MGMT port in the µBST can be configured to
operate either using Auto Negotiation or at a fixed speed/duplex mode (enabling
selection between 10 Mbps Half Duplex, 10 Mbps Full Duplex, 100 Mbps Half
Duplex or 100 Mbps Full Duplex).
BreezeMAX System Manual
108
NPU Menu
4.7.3.1.1
Management Port IP Address
The IP address of the MGMT port.
The default is 10.0.0.1.
4.7.3.1.2
Management Port Subnet Mask
The Subnet mask of the MGMT port.
The default is 255.255.255.0.
4.7.3.1.3
Management Port Gateway
The Gateway IP address of the MGMT port.
The default is 0.0.0.0.
4.7.3.1.4
Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest
Subnet Mask
The Destination Subnet parameters define the IP subnet of stations that can
manage the device when connected via a router to the MGMT port. All
management frames destined for addresses belonging to this group will be routed
via the MGMT port. All management frames that are not destined for these
addresses, or to addresses belonging to the MGMT port local subnet, will be
routed via the DATA port.
The default is 0.0.0.0. for both parameters.
NOTE
The Management Port Gateway, Destination Subnet and Destination Subnet Mask are grouped
together. Exiting the configuration process (e.g. by pressing the Esc button) after configuring just
the first one or two parameters in this group will cancel the changes made.
4.7.3.1.5
Auto Negotiation Option (µBST)
The Management port of the µBST can be configured to operate with Auto
Negotiation Option enabled or disabled.
The default is Enabled.
When the Auto Negotiation Option is enabled, the Speed and Duplex parameter in
the relevant Show menus displays the detected operation mode. When the Auto
Negotiation Option is disabled, the Speed and Duplex parameter in the relevant
Show menus displays the configured operation mode. Upon selection of the
Disable option, the user is prompted to select the speed and duplex:
4.7.3.1.5.1 Select Link Speed and Duplex
This option is applicable only when the Auto Negotiation Option is disabled. The
available options are 10 Mbps Half Duplex, 10 Mbps Full Duplex, 100 Mbps Half
Duplex and 100 Mbps Full Duplex.
BreezeMAX System Manual
109
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.7.3.1.6
Management Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable
The Management Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable parameter allows
enabling/disabling the MGMT port.
NOTE
To prevent the undesired situation where management traffic is unintentionally disabled in both the
MGMT and DATA ports, the Data Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable parameter will be
automatically forced to Enabled upon disabling the Management Port Management Traffic, and vice
versa.
4.7.3.2
Data Port Parameters
These parameters define the IP parameters for the Data port connecting the base
station to the backbone. The DATA port can also be used for In-Band (IB)
management, provided that IB management is enabled. In the current version
In-Band management via the DATA port is always enabled.
4.7.3.2.1
Data Port IP Address
The IP address of the DATA port.
The default is 1.1.1.3.
4.7.3.2.2
Data Port Subnet Mask
The subnet mask of the DATA port.
The default is 255.255.255.0.
4.7.3.2.3
Data Port Gateway
The Gateway IP address of the DATA port.
The default is 0.0.0.0.
4.7.3.2.4
Data Port Management VLAN
This parameter defines the VLAN ID for management frames. If a value between 0
to 4094 is configured for the Management VLAN ID, then the device will accept
management frames only if their VLAN tag is the same as this value.
Available values are 0-4094 or null (empty) for No VLAN.
The default is null (No VLAN).
4.7.3.2.5
Data Port Speed (NPU)
The speed of the Ethernet interface that operates always in full-duplex mode.
The available options are 100 Mbps and 1 Gbps.
The default speed is 100 Mbps.
BreezeMAX System Manual
110
NPU Menu
4.7.3.2.6
Auto Negotiation Option (µBST)
The Data port of the µBST can be configured to operate with Auto Negotiation
Option enabled or disabled.
The default is Enabled.
When the Auto Negotiation Option is enabled, the Speed and Duplex parameter in
the relevant Show menus displays the detected operation mode. When the Auto
Negotiation Option is disabled, the Speed and Duplex parameter in the relevant
Show menus displays the configured operation mode. Upon selection of the
Disable option, the user is prompted to select the speed and duplex:
4.7.3.2.6.1 Select Link Speed and Duplex
This option is applicable only when the Auto Negotiation Option is disabled. The
available options are 10 Mbps Half Duplex, 10 Mbps Full Duplex, 100 Mbps Half
Duplex and 100 Mbps Full Duplex.
4.7.3.2.7
Data Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable
The Data Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable parameter allows
enabling/disabling management traffic via the DATA port.
NOTE
To prevent the undesired situation where management traffic is unintentionally disabled in both the
MGMT and DATA ports, the Management Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable parameter will
be automatically forced to Enabled upon disabling the Data Port Management Traffic, and vice
versa.
4.7.3.3
Authorized Managers
The Authorized Managers submenu enables defining the properties of
management stations that are allowed to manage the Base Station.
The Authorized Manager submenu includes the following options:
4.7.3.3.1
Show All
Select this option to view the details of all currently defined authorized managers.
4.7.3.3.2
Select
This option enables selecting an existing authorized manager for viewing or
updating its properties or for deleting it from the database. The selection is based
on the authorized manager’s IP address. Refer to the following Add section for
details on the configurable parameters.
BreezeMAX System Manual
111
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.7.3.3.3
Add
Select this option to add a new authorized manager. Up to 10 Authorized
Manager can be defined. The following parameters can be configured:
4.7.3.3.3.1 IP Address
The IP address of the Authorized Manager.
4.7.3.3.3.2 Send Traps
The Send Traps parameters whether to enable or disable sending of traps to the
Authorized Manager.
4.7.3.3.3.3 Read Community
The SNMP Read Community to be used by the Authorized Manager. A null Read
Community means that the read (get) operation can only be performed using the
Write Community.
Valid Community strings: Up to 23 printable characters, case sensitive.
4.7.3.3.3.4 Write Community
The SNMP Write Community to be used by the Authorized Manager. A null Write
Community means that the Authorized Manager has Read-only access rights.
Valid Community strings: Up to 23 printable characters, case sensitive.
4.7.3.4
Bridge
The Bridge submenu enables configuring the Bridge Aging Time parameter,
setting the aging time for all addresses in the Forwarding Data Base.
The available values are from 1 to 1440 minutes.
The default is 10 minutes.
4.7.4
Performance Monitoring
The Performance Monitoring option enables to view and reset the NPU Ethernet
Ports counters. The Performance Monitoring submenu includes the following
options:
Data Port
Management Port
All counters
BreezeMAX System Manual
112
NPU Menu
4.7.4.1
Data Port Counters
The Data Port option enables viewing or resetting the DATA port counters. The
information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last
time the counters were reset. The counters are reset each time the NPU is reset,
or upon activating the Reset Counters option.
The Data Port counters include:
Data Port Rx Counters
Packets Received from Ethernet
Packets Transmitted to Internal
Packets Transmitted to Slot 1
Packets Transmitted to Slot 2
Packets Transmitted to Slot 3
Packets Transmitted to Slot 4
Packets Transmitted to Slot 7
Packets Transmitted to Slot 8
Packets Transmitted to Slot 9
Packets Received Errors
Packets Received Discards
Data Port Tx Counters
Packets Transmitted to Ethernet
Packets Received from Internal
Packets Received from Slot 1
Packets Received from Slot 2
Packets Received from Slot 3
BreezeMAX System Manual
113
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Packets Received from Slot 4
Packets Received from Slot 7
Packets Received from Slot 8
Packets Received from Slot 9
Packets Transmitted Errors
Packets Transmitted Discards
4.7.4.2
Management Port Counters
The Management Port option enables viewing or resetting the MGMT port
counters. The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number
since the last time the counters were reset. The counters are reset each time the
NPU is reset, or upon activating the Reset Counters option.
The Management Port counters include:
Management Port Rx Counters
Packets Received from Ethernet
Packets Received Errors
Management Port Tx Counters
Packets Transmitted to Ethernet
Packets Transmitted Errors
4.7.4.3
All Counters
The All Counters option enables viewing or resetting both the DATA port and the
MGMT port counters.
BreezeMAX System Manual
114
AU Menu
4.8
AU Menu
The AU menu includes the following options:
Show Summary
SW Files in NPU
Select
Following is a detailed description of these options.
4.8.1
Show Summary
Select this option to view the current status of all AUs.
For each applicable slot (1-4, 7-9), the display includes the following information:
AU Slot ID
Status: Installed/Not Installed
Fault Status
SW File Name: For an installed AU, this is the SW file of the running version.
For a “Not Installed” AU, this is the SW file in the NPU to be loaded to the AU
when it is installed as well as after each reset (depending on the configured
Operation).
SW Version: For an installed AU, this is the running SW version. For a “Not
Installed” AU, this is the SW Version of the SW file in the NPU to be loaded to
the AU when it is installed as well as after each reset (depending on the
configured Operation).
Operation: The operation to be performed with the loaded file when the AU is
installed, as well as after each reset: Null (do not load), Load (load to Shadow),
Run from Shadow or Set as Main.
SW Download Status: The status of the last SW download operation (or None).
Maximum Number of Voice Calls: The maximum number of voice calls that
can be supported by the AU.
BreezeMAX System Manual
115
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
For more details on SW File/Version and Operation refer to SW Versions Control
on page 119.
4.8.2
SW Files in NPU
Up to three AU SW files can be stored in the NPU. Any of the available files can be
loaded by the NPU to a selected AU. When three AU files are stored in the NPU, a
new file cannot be added until at least one of the existing files is deleted. This
menu enables viewing the current AU SW files stored in the NPU and deleting
selected file(s).
4.8.2.1
Show Files
Select this option to display the AU SW files currently stored in the NPU. For each
available SW file, the file name and the version are shown.
4.8.2.2
Delete a File
Select this option and enter the name of an existing AU SW file to delete it from
the NPU’s memory.
4.8.3
Select
Use this option and select a slot to access the AU Slot # menu that will enable
managing and configuring the AU in the selected slot, or pre-configuring the AU
that will be installed in the slot at a later time.
The available AU slot IDs are 1-4, 7-9.
4.8.4
AU Slot # Menu
The AU Slot # menu enables managing and configuring the AU in the selected
slot, or pre-configuring the AU that will be installed in the slot at a later time. The
AU Slot # menu includes the following options:
Show
Unit Control
Configuration
Performance Monitoring
BreezeMAX System Manual
116
AU Menu
4.8.4.1
Show
Select this option to view the current value/selected option of applicable
parameters. In addition, some general status information is shown, as follows:
General Parameters:
IDU Serial Number
IDU IF Card HW Revision
IDU IF Card HW Configuration
IDU Boot Version
ODU Serial Number
ODU HC08 Version
ODU CPLD Version
IDU Main Card HW Revision
IDU Main Card HW Configuration
IDU Temperature (Celsius)
ODU HW Revision
ODU HW Configuration
ODU Temperature (Celsius)
SW Files and Versions:
Main SW File Name
Main SW Version
BreezeMAX System Manual
117
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Shadow SW File Name
Shadow SW Version
Running From (Main or Shadow)
MAC Parameters:
Base Station ID
ARQ Enable/Disable
Maximum Cell Radius (km)
Phy Parameters:
Frequency Band
Bandwidth (MHz)
Downlink (Tx) Frequency (MHz)
Tx Power (dBm)
Multirate Parameters:
Multirate Enable/Disable
Uplink Basic Rate
Downlink Basic Rate
ATPC Parameters:
ATPC Enable/Disable
Optimal Uplink RSSI (dBm)
Voice Parameters:
Maximum Number of Voice Calls
BreezeMAX System Manual
118
AU Menu
4.8.4.2
Unit Control
The AU Unit Control menu enables resetting the AU and managing the SW
versions of the module.
The Unit Control menu includes the following options:
Reset
Set Factory Defaults
SW Version Control
4.8.4.2.1
Reset Unit
Select this option to reset the unit. To avoid unintentional reset, you will be
prompted to confirm the reset request. Changes to some of the configurable
parameters are applied only after reset. Refer to NPU/Micro Base Station
Parameters Summary on page 177 for information on which parameters are
changeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset.
4.8.4.2.2
Set Factory Defaults
Select this option to set the AU parameters to their factory default values. Refer to
NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters Summary on page 177 for information on
the factory default values of these parameters. The parameters will revert to their
default values after the next reset.
4.8.4.2.3
SW Versions Control
The AU can contain two SW versions:
Main: Each time the AU resets it will reboot using the version defined as
Main.
Shadow: Normally, the Shadow version is the backup version. Each time a
new SW File is downloaded to the AU, it will be stored as a Shadow version,
replacing the previous Shadow Version.
The process of upgrading to a new SW version is controlled by the NPU, and is
performed using one of the AU SW files installed in the NPU. If the specified AU
SW file does not exist in the AU, it will be downloaded to the AU and the
requested operation will be executed, as described below. If it already exists in
the AU, then actual loading is not necessary.
The following options are available in the SW Version Control menu:
4.8.4.2.3.1 Show Versions
Select this option to view the following information:
BreezeMAX System Manual
119
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Versions in AU:
Main SW File Name
Main SW Version
Shadow SW File Name
Shadow SW Version
Running From: Main or Shadow
Available Versions in NPU: The available AU SW file names and the SW
version of each file.
4.8.4.2.3.2 None
Select None to cancel a pending request for another operation (An operation will
be executed only after the next reset).
4.8.4.2.3.3 Download
Select this option to download a specified SW file to the Shadow memory of the
AU.
If the file already exists in the AU, no action will take place.
4.8.4.2.3.4 Run from Shadow
Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU to the Shadow
memory of the AU, reset the AU and reboot using the Shadow version. Note that
because the process is controlled by the NPU, the AU will continue running from
the Shadow version after reset.
If the specified file already exists as the Shadow version (meaning that previously
a Download operation was executed for this file name), the only actual operation
to take place will be to reset and run from Shadow.
If the specified file already exists as the Main version, no action will take place.
4.8.4.2.3.5 Set as Main
Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU to the Shadow
memory of the AU, reset the AU and reboot using the Shadow version, and then
swap the Main and Shadow SW Version, so that the running version (which was
previously the Shadow version) will become the Main version, to be used after
next reset.
If the specified file already exists as the running version and it is defined as the
Shadow version (meaning that previously a Download and Run from Shadow
operation was executed for this file name), the only actual operation to take place
BreezeMAX System Manual
120
AU Menu
will be to swap the Main and Shadow versions. If it is already defined as the Main
version, no action will take place.
4.8.4.3
Configuration
The AU Configuration menu enables viewing and updating the AU’s parameters.
It is important to note that changes to some parameters take effect only after
reset. For these parameters, the applicable Show menus display the Current as
well as the Configured value.
The Configuration menu includes the following options:
MAC
Phy
Multirate
ATPC
Voice Parameters
4.8.4.3.1
MAC Parameters
The AU MAC menu includes the following options:
4.8.4.3.1.1 Show
Select this option to view the current values/options of the MAC (Media Access
Control) parameters.
4.8.4.3.1.2 Update
Select this option to update any of the MAC parameters. The MAC parameters
are:
Base Station ID
The Base Station ID is the unique identifier of the AU/ µBST. An SU can be
authenticated by the AU/ µBST only if its Base Station ID and Base Station
mask match the Base Station ID configured for the AU/ µBST. A change in the
Base Station ID will take effect only after resetting the AU/ µBST.
The Base Station ID consists of 6 groups of up to three digits each, where the
range for each group is 0 to 255. The first 3 groups define the Operator ID,
the next two groups define the Cell ID and the sixth group defines the
AU/µBST ID.
Changes in Base Station ID are applied only after reset
BreezeMAX System Manual
121
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
The default Base Station ID is 186.190.0.0.0.0
ARQ Enable/Disable
The ARQ Enable/Disable parameter controls whether to use an ARQ
algorithm for detecting errors and requesting retransmissions of applicable
unicast messages (applicable only for Best Effort and Non Real Time services).
The default is Disable.
Maximum Cell Radius
The Maximum Cell Radius is used to adapt various timing parameters of the
MAC to the time it takes a message to reach its destination. This time delay is
dependent upon the distance between the originating and receiving units. The
timing parameters should be adapted to the largest expected delay, which is
determined from the distance from the AU/ µBST of the farthest SU served by
it.
NOTE
For Non-Line-Of-Sight (NLOS) links using refractions, the cell distance should be higher than the
line-of-sight distance. Typically a 10% margin is a good estimate for the increase in distance due to
the NLOS operation.
The basic time element (symbol) used by the system is 68 microseconds. This
symbol size is translated to a round trip delay of approximately 20 km, or a
cell radius of 10 km. Thus, it is recommended to set the Maximum Cell
Radius using a resolution of 10 km: the actual timing of the system is the
same for any cell radius larger than N*10 km and smaller than or equal to
(N+1)*10.
NOTE
An SU located at a distance larger than the Maximum Cell Radius will be rejected during the
network entry process.
The values range is from 10 to 100 km. Use 10 km increments (10, 20, 30,
….100).
The default is 20 km.
4.8.4.3.2
Phy Parameters
The AU Phy Parameters menu includes the following options:
4.8.4.3.2.1 Show
Select this option to view the current values/options of the Phy (Physical Layer)
parameters. The radio band of the ODU is also displayed when an AU-IDU
connected to an AU-ODU is installed in the slot.
BreezeMAX System Manual
122
AU Menu
4.8.4.3.2.2 Update
Select this option to update any of the Phy parameters. The Phy parameters are:
Bandwidth
The frequency bandwidth used by the radio. A change in the Bandwidth
parameter will take effect only after resetting the AU/ µBST.
The available options are:
1 – 1.75 MHz
2 – 3.5 MHz
The default is 3.5 MHz.
Downlink (Tx) Frequency
The frequency used in the downlink (from AU/ µBST to SU). The frequency in
the uplink (SU to AU/ µBST) is the Uplink frequency minus 100 MHz. A
change in the Downlink (Tx) Frequency parameter will take effect only after
resetting the AU/ µBST.
The resolution is in increments of 0.125 MHz. The available values depend on
the radio band of the ODU and on the Bandwidth, as follows:
Table 4-4: Range for the Downlink (Tx) Frequency Parameter
Radio Band
Bandwidth
Downlink (Tx) Frequency Range (MHz)
3.5a
3.5 MHz
3501.25 to 3551.75
1.75 MHz
3500.375 to 3552.625
3.5 MHz
3551.75 to 3598.25
1.75 MHz
3550.875 to 3599.125
3.5b
NOTE
If the Radio Band is not known (e.g. the ODU is not installed) then the available range depends
only on the Bandwidth, as follows:
For a Bandwidth of 3.5 MHz: 3501.25 to 3598.25.
For a Bandwidth of 1.75 MHz: 3500.375 to 3599.125.
The default is 3551.75 MHz.
BreezeMAX System Manual
123
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Tx Power
The Tx Power parameter defines the power level of the transmitted signal at
the antenna port of the AU-ODU.
The range is from 13 to 28 dBm using a 0.25 dBm resolution.
The default is 28 dBm.
4.8.4.3.3
Multirate Parameters
BreezeMAX employs a multirate algorithm to dynamically adapt the modulation
scheme and Forward Error Correction (FEC) coding to actual link conditions. The
algorithm is managed by the AU/ µBST taking into account also information
received from the served SUs, and optimal values are calculated separately for the
uplink and downlink for each SU, taking into account also the applicable QoS
requirements. MAP messages transmitted to the SUs include information on the
uplink rate that should be used by each SU for its next transmission.
The Basic Rate is the minimum rate to be used by the Multirate algorithm. In the
downlink, this is also the rate to be used for broadcasts and multicasts.
Broadcasts and multicasts messages are not acknowledged, so that the ARQ
mechanism cannot be used and there is no way to guarantee that all intended
recipients will receive them properly. In addition, AU’s/ µBST’s multicasts and
broadcasts are sent to multiple recipients with different link qualities. Therefore,
it is preferable to use a relatively low rate for these transmissions, thus reducing
the probability of errors and increasing the likelihood that all intended recipients
will receive them properly.
In the uplink, this is the rate to be used by SUs for non-scheduled transmissions,
such as during the contention period.
The Basic Rate is also the initial rate to be used by the algorithm for each new SU
that joins the cell when the Multirate algorithm is enabled.
When the Multirate algorithm is disabled, communication with connected SUs
will continue using the last uplink and downlink rates selected by the Multirate
algorithm. The Set Rates option in the SU (see Set Rates on page 143), which
becomes available only when the Multirate algorithm is disabled in the AU/ µBST,
enables setting the Uplink Current Rate and the Downlink Current Rate to any of
the values listed in Table 4-5.
The multirate algorithm chooses dynamically between 8 rates. These are also the
rates that can be configured for the Base Rate and Default Rate parameters.
BreezeMAX System Manual
124
AU Menu
Table 4-5: Rates (Modulation Schemes and Coding)
No.
Rate
1
BPSK 1/2
2
BPSK 3/4
3
QPSK 1/2
4
QPSK 3/4
5
QAM16 1/2
6
QAM16 3/4
7
QAM64 2/3
8
QAM64 3/4
4.8.4.3.3.1 Show
Select this option to view the current values/options of the Multirate algorithm
parameters.
4.8.4.3.4
Update
Select this option to update any of the Multirate parameters. The Multirate
parameters are:
4.8.4.3.4.1 Multirate Enable/Disable
The Multirate Enable/Disable parameter controls whether the multirate
algorithm should be used to determine current optimal rates in both the uplinks
and the downlinks.
The default is Enable.
NOTE
The multirate algorithm should always be enabled. The option to disable it is available to enable
using a fixed rate to support certain tests. After each reset, the AU/µBST boots with the multirate
enabled, disregarding its status before the device was reset.
4.8.4.3.4.2 Uplink Basic Rate
The Basic Rate for all uplinks.
The available options are listed in Table 4-5 on page 125.
The default rate is the lowest rate BPSK 1/2 (rate 1).
BreezeMAX System Manual
125
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.8.4.3.4.3 Downlink Basic Rate
The Basic Rate for all downlinks.
The available options are listed in Table 4-5 on page 125.
The default rate is the lowest rate BPSK 1/2 (rate 1).
4.8.4.3.5
ATPC Parameters
BreezeMAX employs an Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) algorithm to
dynamically adapt the transmit power of each SU so that it is received by the
AU/µBST at an optimal level. The algorithm is managed by the AU/ µBST and
optimal values are calculated separately for each SU based on the actual level at
which it is received by the AU/ µBST. MAP messages transmitted to the SUs
include information on the estimated up/down power level change required to
achieve optimal transmit power level.
4.8.4.3.6
Show
Select this option to view the current values/options of the ATPC algorithm
parameters.
4.8.4.3.7
Update
Select this option to update any of the ATPC parameters. The ATPC parameters
are:
4.8.4.3.7.1 ATPC Enable/Disable
The ATPC Enable/Disable parameter controls whether the ATPC algorithm
should be used to determine current optimal transmit level for each SU served by
the AU/µBST.
The default is Enable.
NOTE
The ATPC algorithm should always be enabled. The option to disable it is available to enable using
a fixed rate to support certain tests. After each reset, the AU/µBST boots with the ATPC enabled,
disregarding its status before the device was reset.
4.8.4.3.7.2 Optimal Uplink RSSI
The Optimal Uplink RSSI sets the target level at which all transmissions should
be received by the AU/ µBST for optimal performance.
The range is –103 to –60 (dBm).
The default is –69 dBm.
BreezeMAX System Manual
126
AU Menu
4.8.4.3.8
Voice Parameters
The Voice Parameters option includes a single parameter, Maximum Number of
Voice Calls:
4.8.4.3.8.1 Maximum Number of Voice Calls
This parameter sets the upper limit of simultaneous voice calls that will be
supported by the AU.
The range is from 0 to 300 Voice Calls.
The default is 50.
4.8.5
Performance Monitoring
The AU Performance menu includes the following options:
Port Counters
BER Test
Burst Error Rate Counters
4.8.5.1
Ports Counters
The Ports Counters option enables viewing or resetting the Ethernet and Wireless
ports counters. The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated
number since the last time the counters were reset. The counters are reset each
time the AU is reset, or upon activating the Reset option.
NOTE
The Ethernet port in the AU is the internal port between the AU and the NPU.
The counters indicate the traffic at the Ethernet and Wireless ports, as described
in the following figure:
BreezeMAX System Manual
127
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Figure 4-4: Counters Description
For each port, the counters include the frames that were actually transmitted
to/received from the port, the frames transferred to/from the other port
(submitted), and the frames received from/transmitted to the Internal port. The
Internal port refers to the internal management module of the unit that receives
and transmits management and control frames to/from both the Ethernet and
the Wireless ports.
In addition, for each port, the frames that were discarded for various reasons
(errors, overflow etc.) are also counted.
In the Wireless Tx port, the retransmitted frames and the transmitted unicast
frames (not shown in the schematic diagram) are also counted. These counters
serve for calculating the retransmissions rate, providing some indication on link
quality.
The displayed counters include:
Ethernet Port Rx Counters
BreezeMAX System Manual
128
AU Menu
Bytes Received from Ethernet
Bytes Discarded
Bytes Submitted to Wireless
Bytes Submitted to Internal
Ethernet Port Tx Counters
Bytes Submitted from Wireless
Bytes Submitted from Internal
Bytes Transmitted to Ethernet
Bytes Discarded
Wireless Port Rx Counters
Bytes Received from Wireless
Bytes Submitted to Ethernet
Bytes Submitted to Internal
Bytes Discarded
Wireless Port Tx Counters
Bytes Submitted from Ethernet
Bytes Submitted from Internal
Bytes Transmitted to Wireless
Bytes Discarded
Unicast Bytes Transmitted
Bytes Retransmitted
Retransmission Rate (%)
BreezeMAX System Manual
129
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
NOTE
Retransmission Rate is defined as:
100*Bytes Retransmitted/ (Unicast Bytes Transmitted to Wireless)
Note that unacknowledged bytes are retransmitted only if ARQ is enabled. Retransmission is
applicable only for information transmitted using either Best Effort (BE) or Non Real Time (NRT)
Quality of Service.
4.8.5.2
BER Test
The BER Test sub-menu enables to initiate a BER test on the link with a specific
SU, including definition of test parameters, to terminate a test and to view test
results. It includes the following options:
Start Test
Stop Test
Show Test Parameters and Results
4.8.5.2.1
Start Test
Select this option to define the parameters for a Bit Error Rate test and to initiate
a test. The test will be initiated after all parameters have been configured. The
parameters are:
4.8.5.2.1.1 SU MAC Address
The BER test is performed on a link with a specific SU. This is the MAC address
of the applicable SU.
4.8.5.2.1.2 Number of Bytes
The number of BER test bytes to be transmitted. The available range is from
1,000 to 100,000,000 Bytes.
4.8.5.2.1.3 Rate
The rates to be used for the BER test in the uplink and downlink. Refer to Table
4-5 on page 125 for details on the available rates.
4.8.5.2.1.4 Burst Size (Bytes)
The burst size in bytes. The available range is from 500 to 4,000 Bytes.
4.8.5.2.1.5 Test Priority
The service priority of the BER test. Services with higher priority will not be
affected by the test. The available options are RT (Real time), NRT (Non Real
Time), and BE (Best Effort).
BreezeMAX System Manual
130
AU Menu
4.8.5.2.2
Stop Test
Select this option to terminate a currently running BER test.
4.8.5.2.3
Show Test Parameters and Results
Select this option to see the parameters of the last BER test and the results. The
displayed results include the measured BER in the uplink and downlink.
4.8.5.3
Burst Error Rate Counters
The Burst Error rate Counters option enables selecting a specific SU by its MAC
address for viewing or resetting the Burst Error Rate counters for the applicable
downlink. The information displayed for each rate in downlink is the
accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset. The uplink
counters can be viewed in the applicable SU. For each rate the displayed
information includes:
Total Burst
Error Bursts
Error Rate
The counters are reset each time the AU is reset, or upon activating the Reset
option.
BreezeMAX System Manual
131
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.9
SU Menu
The SU menu includes the following options:
Show Summary
Show Summary by AU
SW Files in NPU
Select by Name
Select by MAC Address
Add
Following is a detailed description of these options.
4.9.1
Show Summary
Select this option to view summary information and main details for all connected
and pre-configured SUs.
For each SU, the following information is displayed:
MAC Address
SU Name
SU Status (Permanent or Temporary)
Connected AU Slot ID
Registration Status (In Service, Out Of Service)
SW File Name: For a connected SU, this is the SW file of the running
version. For an SU that is defined but is not connected, this is the SW file
in the NPU/µBST to be loaded to the SU when it is connected, as well as
after each reset (depending on the configured Operation).
SW Version: For a connected SU, this is the running SW version. For an
SU that is defined but is not connected, this is the SW Version of the SW
BreezeMAX System Manual
132
SU Menu
file in the NPU/ µBST to be loaded to the SU when it is installed, as well as
after each reset (depending on the configured Operation).
Operation: The operation to be performed with the loaded file when the SU
is connected, as well as after each reset: Null (do not load), Load (load to
Shadow), Run from Shadow or Set as Main.
SW Download Status: The status of the last SW download operation (or
None).
SU IDU Type
Number of Gateways: The number of Alvarion Gateways connected to the
SU IDU.
Summary Information:
Total Number of SUs: The total number of SUs in the database (including
connected and pre-configured SUs)
Total Connected SUs
SUs Connected to AU Slot N, where N=1-4, 7-9.
NOTE
An SU that is defined as Temporary will be deleted from the database when it is disconnected.
4.9.2
Show Summary by AU
Select this option to view the total number of SUs connected to a specific AU as
well as main details on these SUs, as described in Show Summary (SU Manu) on
page 132. You will be prompted to select the required AU Slot ID.
4.9.3
SW Files in NPU/µBST
Up to three SU SW files can be stored in the NPU/µBST. Any of the available files
can be loaded by the NPU/µBST to a selected SU. When three SU files are stored
in the NPU/µBST, a new file cannot be added until at least one of the existing
files is deleted. This menu enables viewing the current SU SW files stored in the
NPU/µBST and deleting selected file(s). It also enables defining a Default SU File,
which is the file to be loaded to any new temporary SU when the Base Station
operates in Quick Mode in order to provide it with the defined Default Service(s).
Refer to Services Menu – General Parameters on page 150 for more information
on Quick Mode and Default SU Profiles.
BreezeMAX System Manual
133
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.9.3.1
Show Files
Select this option to display the SU SW files currently stored in the NPU/µBST.
For each available SW file, the file name and the version number are displayed.
In addition, the Default SW File Name and Default Action are also displayed.
4.9.3.2
Default File Name
The Default File Name is the name of the SU file to be used for new temporary
SUs when operating in Quick Mode.
4.9.3.3
Default Action
The Default Action is the action to be taken with the Default SU File when a new
temporary SU joins the cell when operating in Quick Mode.
The available options are:
1 - None
2 – Download
3 –Run from Shadow
4 – Set as Main
4.9.3.4
Delete a File
Select this option and enter the name of an existing SU SW file to delete it from
the NPU/µBST Flash memory.
4.9.4
Select by Name
Use this option to select an SU by name to access the SU # menu that will enable
managing and configuring the selected SU, viewing its performance information
or deleting it from the database.
4.9.5
Select by MAC Address
Use this option to select an SU by its MAC address to access the SU # menu that
will enable managing and configuring the selected SU, viewing its performance
information or deleting it from the database.
4.9.6
SU # Menu
The SU # menu enables managing and configuring the selected SU. The SU #
menu includes the following options:
Show
Unit Control
BreezeMAX System Manual
134
SU Menu
Configuration
Performance Monitoring
Delete
4.9.6.1
Show
Select this option to view the current value/selected option of applicable
parameters. In addition, some general status information is displayed, as follows:
Equipment and Registration Parameters:
MAC Address
SU Name
Organization Name
Address
Country Code
SU Status (Permanent or Temporary)
Connected AU Slot ID
SU IDU Type
Number of Gateways
Current Link Quality Indicators
Uplink RSSI (dBm)
Uplink SNR (dB)
Uplink Current Rate
Downlink RSSI (dBm)
Downlink SNR (dB)
Downlink Current Rate
BreezeMAX System Manual
135
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
General ODU Parameters
Serial Number
RF Card HW Revision
RF Card HW Configuration
Boot Version
Main Card HW Revision
Main Card HW Configuration
SW Versions information:
Main SW File Name
Main SW Version
Shadow SW File Name
Shadow SW Version
Running From (Main or Shadow)
MAC Parameters
Base Station ID
Base Station Mask
Phy Parameters
Bandwidth (MHz)
Uplink (Tx) Frequency (MHz)
ATPC Parameters
ATPC Support
TX Power (dBm)
Bridging Parameters
BreezeMAX System Manual
136
SU Menu
Enable/Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices
Maximum Number of Supported Devices
Bridge Aging Time (minutes)
4.9.6.2
Unit Control
The SU Unit Control menu enables defining the SU’s status, resetting the SU and
managing the SW versions of the unit.
The Unit Control menu includes the following options:
Status
Reset
Set Factory Defaults
SW Version Control
4.9.6.2.1
SU Status
The SU Status parameter enables defining the status of the SU, which determines
the services it can receive.
The available options are:
1 – Permanent
2 – Temporary
NOTE
An SU that is defined as Temporary will be deleted from the database when it is disconnected.
4.9.6.2.2
Reset Unit
Select this option to reset the unit. To avoid unintentional reset, you will be
prompted to confirm the reset request. Changes to some of the configurable
parameters are applied only after reset. Refer to NPU/Micro Base Station
Parameters Summary on page 177 for information on which parameters are
changeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset.
4.9.6.2.3
Set Factory Defaults
Select this option to set the SU parameters to their factory default values. Refer to
SU Parameters Summary on page 152 for information on the factory default
BreezeMAX System Manual
137
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
values of these parameters. The parameters will revert to their default values
after the next reset.
4.9.6.2.4
SW Versions Control (only for Permanent SUs)
The SU can contain two SW versions:
Main: Each time the SU resets it will reboot using the version defined as
Main.
Shadow: Normally the Shadow version is the backup version. Each time a
new SW File is downloaded to the SU, it will be stored as a Shadow version,
replacing the previous Shadow Version.
The process of upgrading to a new SW version is controlled by the NPU/µBST,
and is performed using one of the SU SW files installed in the NPU/µBST. If the
specified SU SW file does not exist in the SU, it will be downloaded to the SU and
the requested operation will be executed, as described below. If it already exists
in the SU, then actual loading is not necessary.
The following options are available in the SW Version Control menu:
Show SW Versions
None
Download
Run from Shadow
Set as Main
4.9.6.2.4.1 Show SW Versions
Select this option to view the following information:
SW Versions in SU:
Main SW File Name
Main SW Version
Shadow SW File Name
Shadow SW Version
Running From: Main or Shadow
BreezeMAX System Manual
138
SU Menu
Available Versions in NPU/µBST: The available SU SW file names and the SW
Version of each file.
4.9.6.2.4.2 None
Select None to cancel a pending request for another operation (an operations will
be executed only after the next reset).
4.9.6.2.4.3 Download
Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU/µBST to the
Shadow memory of the SU.
If the specified file already exists in the SU, no action will take place.
4.9.6.2.4.4 Run from Shadow
Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU/µBST to the
Shadow memory of the SU, reset the SU and reboot using the Shadow version.
Note that because the process is controlled by the NPU, the SU will continue
running from the Shadow version after reset.
If the specified file already exists as the Shadow version (meaning that previously
a Download operation was executed for this file name), the only actual operation
to take place will be to reset and run from Shadow.
If the specified file is the current Main version, no action will take place.
4.9.6.2.4.5 Set as Main
Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU/µBST to the
Shadow memory of the SU, reset the SU and reboot using the Shadow version,
and then swap the Main and Shadow SW Version, so that the running version
(which was previously the Shadow version) will become the Main version, to be
used after next reset.
If the specified file already exists as the running version and it is defined as the
Shadow version (meaning that previously a Download and Run from Shadow
operation was executed for this file name), the only actual operation to take place
will be to swap the Main and Shadow versions. If it is already defined as the Main
version, no action will take place.
4.9.6.3
Configuration
The SU Configuration menu enables viewing and updating the SU’s parameters.
The Configuration menu includes the following options:
Registration
MAC
BreezeMAX System Manual
139
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Phy
Multirate and ATPC
Voice/Networking Gateways
Ethernet Port
Installer Password
Bridging Parameters
4.9.6.3.1
Registration Parameters
The SU Registration Parameters option in the NPU/µBST Monitor enables viewing
the SU’s Registration parameters. The Registration parameters can be configured
only locally at the SU (via the Ethernet port).
4.9.6.3.1.1 SU Name
The default SU Name given to a new SU during the definition process (see Add
New SU on page 149) is SU@<SU’s MAC Address>.
An SU Name can be configured only for SUs that are not registered. When an SU
is registered, it receives services based on its MAC address. When the SU
connects and becomes registered, the SU Name in the Base Station/Micro Base
Station will be replaced by the name configured in the SU (Common Name).
4.9.6.3.1.2 Organization Name
The Organization Name configured in the SU.
4.9.6.3.1.3 Address
The Address configured in the SU.
4.9.6.3.1.4 Country Code
The Country name configured in the SU.
4.9.6.3.2
MAC Parameters
The SU MAC Parameters menu includes the following options:
4.9.6.3.2.1 Show
Select this option to view the current values/options of the MAC parameters.
BreezeMAX System Manual
140
SU Menu
4.9.6.3.2.2 Update
Select this option to update any of the MAC parameters. The MAC parameters
are:
4.9.6.3.2.2.1 Base Station ID
The Base Station ID is the identifier of the AU/µBST to which the SU can
connect. An SU can be authenticated by an AU/µBST only if the Base Station ID
and Base Station ID Mask configured in the SU match the Base Station ID
configured for the AU/µBST. A change in the Base Station ID and Base Station ID
Mask will take effect only after resetting the SU.
The Base Station ID consists of six groups of up to three digits each, where the
range for each group is 0 to 255. The first three groups define the Operator ID,
the next two groups define the Cell ID and the sixth group defines the Sector (AU)
ID.
A change in the Base Station ID is applied only after reset.
The default Base Station ID is 186.190.0.0.0.0
4.9.6.3.2.2.2 Base Station ID Mask
The Base Station ID Mask, together with the Base station ID define the
AU(s)/µBST(s) that can synchronize with the SU.
The Base Station ID Mask consists of 6 groups of up to 3 digits each, where the
range of each group is 0 to 255. The first 3 groups form the mask for the
Operator ID. The next 2 groups form the mask for the Cell ID, and the last group
forms the mask for the Sector ID.
A change in the Base Station ID Mask is applied only after reset.
The default Base Station ID Mask is 255.255.255.0.0.0.
BreezeMAX System Manual
141
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.9.6.3.3
Phy Parameters
The SU Phy Parameters menu includes the following options:
4.9.6.3.3.1 Show
Select this option to view the current value/option of the Phy (Physical Layer)
parameters.
4.9.6.3.3.2 Update
Select this option to update any of the Phy parameters. The Phy parameters are:
4.9.6.3.3.3 Bandwidth (MHz)
The frequency bandwidth used by the radio. A change in the Bandwidth
parameter will take effect only after resetting the SU.
The available options are:
1 – 1.75 MHz
2 – 3.5 MHz
The default is 3.5 MHz.
4.9.6.3.3.4 Uplink (Tx) Frequency (MHz)
The frequency used in the uplink (from SU to AU/µBST). The frequency in the
downlink (AU/µBST to SU) is the Uplink frequency plus 100 MHz.
A change in the Uplink Frequency parameter will take effect only after resetting
the SU.
The resolution is in steps of 0.125 MHz. The available values depend on the
Bandwidth, as follows:
For a Bandwidth of 3.5 MHz: 3401.25 to 3498.25.
For a Bandwidth of 1.75 MHz: 3400.375 to 3499.125.
The default is 3451.75 MHz.
4.9.6.3.4
Multirate and ATPC Parameters
The Multirate and ATPC mechanism are controlled by the AU/µBST (except to the
option to temporarily control them locally at the SU for testing purposes). The
Show Multirate and ATPC Status and Parameters option enables viewing the
current status of the applicable parameters. The Set Rates option can be used to
set uplink and downlink rates per SU only when Multirate is disabled.
4.9.6.3.4.1 Show
The Show option enables viewing the current status of the following parameters:
Uplink RSSI (dBm)
BreezeMAX System Manual
142
SU Menu
Uplink SNR (dB)
Uplink Rate
Downlink RSSI (dBm)
Downlink SNR (dB)
Downlink Rate
ATPC Support
Tx Power (dBm)
4.9.6.3.4.2 Set Rates
The Set Rates option is available only when the Multirate algorithm is disabled in
the AU/µBST (see Multirate Parameters on page 124), allowing to set the Uplink
Current Rate and the Downlink Current Rate to any of the values listed in Table
4-5 on page 125.
The defaults are the last rates used by the Multirate algorithm before it was
disabled. For SUs that join the cell when the Multirate algorithm is disabled, the
defaults are the applicable Basic Rates.
4.9.6.3.5
Voice/Networking Gateways
The Voice/Networking Gateways option enables viewing details on the
Voice/Networking Gateways connected to the SU. This is applicable only for
Alvarion’s Gateways supporting the DRAP protocol. For each Gateway, the
following details are provided:
Gateway Type
IP Address
VLAN ID
Number Of Active Calls (applicable only for Voice Gateways)
The following gateways are currently available from Alvarion:
IDU-NG-4D1W: A Networking Gateway that serves also as an SU-IDU,
supporting 4 data ports and 1 Wireless LAN port.
AVG-1D1V: A stand-alone (external) Voice Gateway, supporting 1 data port
and 1 POTS port, with advanced routing functionality.
BreezeMAX System Manual
143
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
AVG-1D2V: A stand-alone (external) Voice Gateway, supporting 1 data port
and 2 POTS ports, with advanced routing functionality.
4.9.6.3.6
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet Port menu enables configuration of the Ethernet port operation
mode (speed and duplex).
4.9.6.3.6.1 Show
The Show option enables viewing the configured and actual operation modes:
Current Mode: The current operation mode used by the SU.
Configured Mode: The operation mode to be used by the SU after the next
reset.
Detected Mode: The actual operation mode. When the Current Mode is Auto
Negotiation, the Detected Mode displays actual speed/duplex parameters
used by the SU as a result of the auto negotiation process.
4.9.6.3.6.2 Update
Select the Update option to configure the Ethernet Port Configuration
parameter. The available options are 10 Half, 10 Full, 100 Half, 100 Full and
Auto Negotiation.
The default is Auto Negotiation.
4.9.6.3.7
Installer Password
The Installer Password option enables viewing the current Installer Password and
configuring a new password. The Installer Password is used for accessing the
SU’s Monitor (Installer) program locally, using Telnet via the SU’s Ethernet port.
The Installer Password consists of a string of up to 20 printable characters, case
sensitive.
The default Installer Password is installer.
4.9.6.3.8
Bridging Parameters
The Bridging Parameters menu enables setting a limit on the maximum number
of Ethernet devices behind the SU and configuring the aging time for devices in
the SU’s bridging table. The Bridging parameters are:
4.9.6.3.8.1 Enable/Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices
If the Enable/Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices parameter is set to
Disable, the maximum number of supported devices is 512.
The default is Disable.
BreezeMAX System Manual
144
SU Menu
4.9.6.3.8.2 Maximum Number of Supported Devices
This parameter is applicable only when the Enable/Disable Limit on Number of
Supported Devices parameter is set to Enable.
The available range is from 1 to 512 devices.
The default is 512.
4.9.6.3.8.3 Bridge Aging Time
The Bridge Aging Time sets the aging time for all addresses in the SU’s
Forwarding Data Base.
The available values are from 1 to 1440 minutes.
The default is 3 minutes.
4.9.6.4
Performance Monitoring
The Performance Monitoring sub-menu provides the following options:
Ports Counters
Burst Error Rate Counters
4.9.6.4.1
SU Ports Counters
The SU Ports Counters menu enables viewing or resetting the Ethernet and
Wireless ports counters. The information displayed for each counter is the
accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset. The counters
are reset each time the SU is reset, or upon activating the Reset Counters option.
The counters indicate the traffic at the Ethernet and Wireless ports, as described
in the following figure:
BreezeMAX System Manual
145
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Figure 4-5: Counters Description
For each port, the counters include the frames that were actually transmitted
to/received from the port, the frames transferred to/from the other port
(submitted), and the frames received from/transmitted to the Internal port. The
Internal port refers to the internal management module of the unit that receives
and transmits management and control frames to/from both the Ethernet and
the Wireless ports.
In addition, for each port, the frames that were discarded for various reasons
(errors, overflow etc.) are also counted.
In the Wireless Tx port, the retransmitted frames and the transmitted unicast
frames (not shown in the schematic diagram) are also counted. These counters
serve for calculating the retransmissions rate, providing some indication on link
quality.
The displayed counters include:
Ethernet Port Rx Counters
BreezeMAX System Manual
146
SU Menu
Bytes Received from Ethernet
Bytes Discarded
Bytes Submitted to Wireless
Bytes Submitted to Internal
Ethernet Port Tx Counters
Bytes Submitted from Wireless
Bytes Submitted from Internal
Bytes Transmitted to Ethernet
Bytes Discarded
Wireless Port Rx Counters
Bytes Received from Wireless
Bytes Submitted to Ethernet
Bytes Submitted to Internal
Bytes Discarded
Wireless Port Tx Counters
Bytes Submitted from Ethernet
Bytes Submitted from Internal
Bytes Transmitted to Wireless
Bytes Discarded
Unicast Bytes Transmitted
Bytes Retransmitted
Retransmission Rate (%)
BreezeMAX System Manual
147
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
NOTE
Retransmission Rate is defined as:
100*Bytes Retransmitted/ (Unicast Bytes Transmitted to Wireless)
Note that unacknowledged bytes are retransmitted only if ARQ is enabled. Retransmission is
applicable only for information transmitted using either Best Effort (BE) or Non Real Time (NRT)
Quality of Service.
4.9.6.4.2
Burst Error Rate Counters
Data is transmitted in bursts, as described in the following figure, where each
burst includes a CRC string.
DL
first
burst
DL Burst 2
DL Burst 3
DL burst 4
DL burst 5
MAP
UL
MA
preamble
MAINT Period
preambl
preambl
DL
UL
Burs
t2
UL
Burst
3
UL
Burst
3
UL
burst
4
Unicast Scheduled period
Contention
period
Multi cast Scheduled period
Figure 4-6: Uplink and Downlink Scheduled Transmissions
In the downlink, each burst uses a single rate and may include data intended for
several SUs. In the uplink, each burst is from a different SU (also using a single
rate).
The Burst Error rate Counters option enables viewing or resetting the uplink
Burst Error Rate counters. The information displayed for each rate in uplink is
the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset. For each
rate the displayed information includes:
Total Burst
Error Bursts
Error Rate
The counters are reset each time the SU is reset, or upon activating the Reset
option.
4.9.6.5
Delete
This option enables deleting the selected SU from the database.
BreezeMAX System Manual
148
SU Menu
4.9.7
Add New SU
Select the Add New SU option to add a new SU to the database. The Add New SU
sub-menu includes the following parameters:
SU MAC Address
SW File Name: The SW File to be used by the SU. Should be either a File
Name known to exist in the SU or an SU SW File Name in the Micro Base
Station/NPU.
A new SU that attempts to communicate with the base station when the base
station operates in Advanced Mode will be registered only if its MAC address
exists in the database.
BreezeMAX System Manual
149
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.10
Services Menu
4.10.1 Introduction
4.10.1.1
Services
A Service is a virtual connection between a Subscriber’s application and the
Network Resource. The Network Resource could be Internet, Content Provider,
Corporate Network, etc.
The Services are implemented as IEEE 802.16 connections within the wireless
domain. Each Service can include up to 4 uplink and 4 downlink connections.
Implementation within the provider’s backbone domain depends on the specific
backbone network.
A Subscriber is an entity that may be associated with any number of devices
connected to any number of SUs. Each Service associates a certain Service Profile
with Subscriber’s device(s) behind a specific SU.
The Service Profile’s properties depend on the Service Type. All data Services have
the following properties:
VLAN ID based Classification: Each Service can be associated with up to 16
VLAN IDs, enabling creation of VLANs within the wireless domain and
differentiation of services to different end-users behind the same SU based on
VLAN ID classification.
NOTE
In the current version, the proper use of VLAN ID based classification for differentiating among
several end-users served by the same SU is possible only with a VLAN switch with VLAN Binding
capability.
Quality of Service (QoS) and Priority based Classification: Up to 4 uplink and
4 downlink QoS profiles can be assigned to each Service. The data will be
mapped onto these connections by either IEEE 802.1p or DSCP priority tags.
This will lead to creation of the corresponding number of Uplink and
Downlink connections supporting differentiated services to up to 4
applications based on either IEEE 802.1p or DSCP prioritization schemes. In
cases where prioritization is not used, a single pair of uplink/downlink
connections is created.
Forwarding Rules: A Forwarding Rule is assigned to each Service, defining
various features that define the handling of certain message types in the
wireless domain. These may include Unicast and Multicast Forwarding rules,
BreezeMAX System Manual
150
Services Menu
QoS Profile and VLAN ID for Multicasts and Unknown Address Forwarding
Policy. The available features depend on the Service Type. The data may be
switched only between the Services that share the same Forwarding Rule. In
all other respects the service functions as a standard Bridge.
Aggregation: Several Services in the Wireless Domain may be aggregated into
a single Virtual Private Link (VPL) in the backbone domain.
Priority Marking: Ethernet frames transmitted to the backbone may be
marked with a configurable priority (DSCP or IEEE 802.1p), enabling the
upstream network to handle the traffic accordingly.
Auto-configuration: The Ethernet Addresses of the Subscribers’ PCs are
automatically learnt just as in a standard Bridge. For each Ethernet Address
it also learns the VLAN behind the SU it belongs to.
Currently, the following Service types are supported:
L2 (layer 2) Data Service
PPPoE Data Service
Voice Service
4.10.1.2
Service Types
4.10.1.2.1 L2 Service
L2 (Layer 2) service transports Layer 2 (Ethernet) frames between the subscriber's
site and the Network Resource located behind the provider's backbone and/or
between the subscriber's sites. It is assumed that the backbone either supports
encapsulation of the Layer 2 frames (e.g. over ATM) or routes the frames
according to the applicable Layer 3 protocol, which could be different from IP. The
Network Resource is assumed to be a corporate network.
NOTE
An L2 Service supports also DRAP-based Voice Service, as described in the next page.
4.10.1.2.2 PPPoE Service
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) Access service provides connectivity
between a PPPoE enabled devices at the subscriber's site and a PPPoE aware
Access Concentrator behind the Base Station. The frames are forwarded only
between the Subscribers' PCs and the PPPoE Access Concentrator. Frames that
are not PPPoE Ethertype are discarded. In the uplink, frames are never relayed
BreezeMAX System Manual
151
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
but only forwarded to the Access Concentrator. In the downlink, broadcasts are
allowed only in cases of unknown addresses.
4.10.1.2.3 Voice Service
The Voice over IP (VoIP) service provides telephony services through an external
Voice Gateway connected to the Subscriber Unit’s data port. The VoIP service is
designed for Alvarion’s Voice Gateways, using the proprietary DRAP signaling
protocol to identify VoIP sessions and to verify optimal handling of these sessions.
Upon provisioning of such a service, the system automatically handles Signaling
and RTP connections establishment, including QoS issues.
NOTE
The DRAP-based Voice Service is also available when an L2 Service is provisioned.
DRAP (Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol) is a protocol between the Gateway
(installed behind the Subscriber Unit) and the base station. The protocol provides
an auto-discovery mechanism for the Gateway, so that no specific configuration
is needed and the Gateway can automatically locate and register with the base
station. The protocol uses a few simple messages enabling a Voice Gateway to
request resources when calls are made, and the base station to dynamically
allocate them.
Using the DRAP solution has the following advantages:
Maintain telephony toll quality over the wireless network – dynamically
allocate Continuous Grant (CG) connections for active calls, maintaining the
QoS and low jitter needed for toll-quality voice services.
Allocate CG bandwidth only for the duration of the call – the air resources are
allocated and released according to the DRAP messages, which are based on
the VoIP signaling. This dynamic allocation ensures efficient use of the air
resources.
Prevent callers from placing calls if a sector is overloaded – the operator can
control and limit the maximum number of concurrent calls per wireless sector
and per end user voice gateway. Thus, the operator has complete control of its
network and the resources in it.
Automatic support of Codec changing in a VoIP call – the DRAP messages
update the BreezeMAX equipment on any Codec change or subsequent
bandwidth allocation change during the call, hence the exact required
bandwidth is always provided. This is essential in fax transmissions where the
call might begin with one Codec and switch to another to accommodate the
fax transmission.
BreezeMAX System Manual
152
Services Menu
VoIP stack is always in synch with the wireless transport – as the DRAP is
integrated into the VoIP stack all calls are terminated according to the VoIP
standard. Even if no resources are available, the voice gateway receives an
appropriate message from the BreezeMAX system and sends the required
signaling message according to the VoIP standard used.
4.10.1.3
Supporting Generic (3rd Party) VoIP Services
When using VoIP devices that do not support the DRAP protocol, the required
service can be provided through a Data (L2) service with a CG QoS (see QoS
Profiles on page 166) that is defined in accordance with the estimated bandwidth
required for the service. The required bandwidth depends on several parameters,
such as codec type, sample rate and T.38 Fax Relay support. The service
parameters depend also on the marking features of the VoIP equipment (the
ability to use either DSCP or 802.1p to distinguish between RTP, RTCP and VoIP
Signaling, and Data traffic).
The system includes several pre-configured Service Profiles for commonly used
VoIP applications. For details on the pre-configured profiles, refer to Preconfigured Profiles on page 169. For details on defining Service Profiles for generic
VoIP devices, refer to Appendix E - Defining Service Profiles forGeneric (nonDRAP) VoIP Gateways.
4.10.1.4
Advanced and Quick Service Modes
A BreezeMAX Base Station can operate in either Advanced or Quick Mode of
service provisioning.
Advanced Mode enables operators to completely deny services to SUs that are not
defined in the system. This increases the security of the system but complicates
slightly the installation process as an SU must be defined in the system before it
can be registered and receive any service.
Quick Mode is intended primarily for scenarios where the operator is not
concerned with potentially “stolen” SUs, and wishes to provide basic services also
to SUs that are not yet defined in the system. It may also be used as a temporary
operation mode during SUs installation phase.
In both modes, defined services are provisioned to defined SUs. The difference
between the two modes is in provisioning of services to SUs that are not defined
in the system.
In Advanced Mode, an undefined SU that is authenticated by the system will be
added to the database of the NPU (NMS) as Temporary. The database will include
also its MAC address and the configured registration parameters. No services are
provided as long as the SU is defined as Temporary. To receive services, the SU
must be defined in the system. When it becomes a Permanent SU, the required
services can be assigned to it.
BreezeMAX System Manual
153
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
In Quick Mode, an undefined SU that is authenticated by the system will be
added to the database of the NPU (NMS) as Temporary. The subscriber will be
able to use only services based on the Default Service Profile(s). When the SU is
defined as Permanent and services are assigned to it, it will be able to use the
defined services.
When changing the status of an SU from Permanent to Temporary, the SU must
be reset to perform a new network entry process for getting the correct Default
Service.
4.10.1.5
Using VLANs and VPLs
VLANs can be used for creating within the BreezeMAX network virtual groups of
multiple end-users (stations) belonging to the same organization (Subscriber).
They may also be used to differentiate between different end-users (stations)
connected to the same SU.
In the current release, implementation of VLANs necessitates using a VLAN
tagging device behind the relevant SUs.
The VLAN functionality of the SU differs from that of the NPU/µBST. The SU
operates in transparent mode: If no VLAN ID is defined (the VLAN ID List is
empty), frames with a VLAN ID tag will pass.
In the backbone, VPL ID (Virtual Private Link ID) is used. VPL is a virtual
connection between two points on the network, such as a base station and a
service provider or corporate network, identified by the VPL ID, with functionality
that is similar to VLAN ID (VLAN on the backbone network). Typically, it is used
to separate between different traffic types (e.g. Data and Voice), or traffic to/from
different ISPs or different corporate networks.
If the VPL ID is None (No VPL ID), frames with a VLAN ID tag arriving from the
downlink (the infrastructure side) will be discarded. Tagged frames arriving from
the wireless domain will be forwarded without a VLAN tag, unless 802.1p Priority
Marking is used. If 802.1p Priority Marking is used, tagged frames will be
forwarded with VPL ID = 0 and the defined Priority Marking Value.
If the VPL ID is other than None, all frames forwarded to the network will be
tagged with the VPL ID. The VLAN ID in tagged frames arriving from the wireless
network will be replaced by the VPL ID.
The guidelines that should be followed when defining various parameters related
to VLAN are:
Several Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID. However, the following
rules must be met:
Any number of L2 and/or VoIP Service Profiles may share the same VPL
ID, provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule.
BreezeMAX System Manual
154
Services Menu
Any number of PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID,
provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule.
Any number of L2, VoIP and PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same
VPL ID, provided that all L2/Voice Service Profiles use the same
Forwarding Rule A, and all PPPoE Service Profiles use the same
Forwarding Rule B, where A and B are different.
A specific VLAN ID behind a certain SU can be associated only with a single
Service of a certain Service Type. It is not possible to define two Services of the
same Service Type for the same SU and VLAN ID. However, the same SU and
VLAN ID can be associated with two Services of different Service Types,
excluding the combination of L2 Service and Voice Service.
The maximum number of VLAN IDs (behind the same SU) that can be
associated with a single Service is 16. In the current version, a VLAN switch
with VLAN Binding capability must be used to support more than one VLAN
ID behind an SU. Otherwise, only a single VLAN ID can be used behind an
SU, and this VLAN ID must equal the Multicast VLAN ID in the Forwarding
Rule that is used in the applicable Service Profile(s).
All Services associated with the same SU must use either VLAN ID(s) or No
VLAN. It is not possible to define for the same SU one or more Services with
VLAN ID(s) together with Service Profile(s) that are not associated with any
VLAN.
4.10.2 Common Operations in Services Menu
Except for the General submenu, all submenus available in the Services menu
enable viewing, editing, deleting and adding applicable entities, such as
Subscribers, Services, Service Profiles, etc.
Some or all of the following options are available in all submenus of the Services
menu:
4.10.2.1
Show All
Select this option to see the current details of all entities in the applicable
submenu (Subscribers, Services, etc.).
4.10.2.2
Show by
This option enables selecting an entity by a specific identifier such as Name or
MAC Address. Select this option and enter the appropriate parameter’s value to
access the menu for a selected entity. This will enable you to choose from the
following options:
BreezeMAX System Manual
155
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Show: Select this option to view the details of the selected entity.
Update: Select this option to edit the details of the selected entity.
Delete: Select this option to remove the selected entity from the database.
4.10.2.3
Show List
Select this option to view all defined entities in the applicable submenu sorted by
the entity type ID (Subscriber ID, Service ID, etc). The entity ID is an identifier
attached automatically to each new entity. You can select a specific entity by its
ID. This will open the Selected Entity menu with the Show, Update and Delete
options described above.
4.10.2.4
Select
Select this option to select an entity by its Name. This will open the Selected
Entity menu with the Show, Update and Delete options described above.
4.10.2.5
Add
Select this option to add a new entity to the database.
4.10.3 The Services Menu
The Services menu includes the following options:
General
Subscribers
Service
Service Profile
Forwarding Rules
Priority Classification
QoS Profile
4.10.3.1
General
The General menu includes parameters that are common to all Subscribers. It
includes the following options:
BreezeMAX System Manual
156
Services Menu
4.10.3.1.1 Show
Select this option to view the current values/options of the General parameters.
4.10.3.1.2 Update
Select this option to update any of the General parameters. The General
parameters are:
4.10.3.1.2.1 Service Mode
The Service Mode of the base station.
The available options are:
1 – Advanced
2 – Quick
For more information on Service Modes refer to Advanced and Quick Service
Modes on page 152.
The default Service Mode is Quick (2).
4.10.3.1.2.2 Default Data Service Profile
The default data Service Profile to be used by temporary SUs in Quick Mode.
Available profiles – any of the Data Service Profiles existing in the database.
4.10.3.1.2.3 Default VoIP Service Profile
The default Voice Service Profile to be used by temporary SUs in Quick Mode.
Available profiles – any of the Voice Service Profiles existing in the database.
4.10.3.2
Subscribers
The Subscribers menu enables defining new Subscribers, viewing or editing
details of previously defined Subscribers and removing Subscribers from the
database.
The configurable Subscriber’s parameters are:
4.10.3.2.1 Subscriber Name
This is the name of the subscriber, which must be unique for the entire network.
A Subscriber Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.
4.10.3.2.2 First Name
An optional parameter for information purposes.
A First Name consists of up to 50 printable characters.
BreezeMAX System Manual
157
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.10.3.2.3 Last Name
An optional parameter for information purposes.
A Last Name consists of up to 50 printable characters.
4.10.3.2.4 Description
An optional parameter for information purposes.
A Description consists of up to 50 printable characters
4.10.3.2.5 Admin Status
The administrative status of the Subscriber can be either Enabled or Disabled.
Select Disabled to disable all services to the Subscriber.
4.10.3.3
Services
Each Service defines the Service Profile for a specific Subscriber’s station(s)
behind a specific SU.
The Services menu enables defining new Services, viewing or editing details of
previously defined Services and removing Services from the database.
The Services menu also enables viewing and resetting the Service counters.
4.10.3.3.1 Service Parameters
The Service’s parameters are:
4.10.3.3.1.1 Name
A Service Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.
4.10.3.3.1.2 Subscriber Name
The Subscriber to which the Service is allocated.
The Subscriber Name must be one of the names that exist in the database after
being defined using the Subscribers menu.
4.10.3.3.1.3 Service Profile Name
The Service Profile to be used in the Service.
The Service Profile Name must be one of the names that exist in the database
after being defined using the Service Profile menu.
4.10.3.3.1.4 SU MAC Address
The MAC Address of the SU associated with the Service.
The SU MAC Address must be one of the addresses that exist in the database
after being defined as a Permanent SU in the SU menu.
BreezeMAX System Manual
158
Services Menu
The MAC Address can be changed (in Update option) only if the Admin status of
the Service is set to Disabled.
4.10.3.3.1.5 VLAN List
A list of VLAN IDs listing the VLAN IDs behind the SU associated with the
applicable Subscriber.
The list includes VLAN IDs, each one in the range of 0 to 4094, separated by
commas. Select null (empty string) for No VLAN. The VLAN List is not displayed in
Show menus if the list is empty.
Refer to Using VLANs on page 154 for guidelines regarding VLAN ID
configuration.
4.10.3.3.1.6 Admin Status
The administrative status of the Service can be either Enabled or Disabled. Select
Disabled to disable the Service.
4.10.3.3.1.7 Operation Status
A read-only display of the operational status that is available in the Show menus
only. Up means that the Service is currently in use.
4.10.3.3.2 Performance
The Performance sub-menu enables viewing and resetting the connections’
counters of the Service. For each connection in each direction the following
information is displayed:
Connection ID and direction
Bytes Submitted
Bytes Transmitted
Bytes Retransmitted
Bytes Dropped
Bytes Discarded
Packets Submitted
Packets Transmitted
Packets Dropped
Packets Discarded
BreezeMAX System Manual
159
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Average Delay (microseconds)
Delay Variance (microseconds)
Maximum Delay (microseconds)
CIR Performance (%)
Data Loss Indicator (%)
MIR Performance (%)
Average Throughput (bits/s)
4.10.3.4
Service Profile
Each Service Profile defines the properties of the defined service. Each Service
Profile is associated with specific Forwarding Rule and Priority Classifier.
The Service Profile menu enables defining new Service Profiles, viewing or editing
details of previously defined Service Profiles and removing Service Profiles from
the database.
The configurable Service Profile’s parameters are:
4.10.3.4.1 Service Profile Name
A Service Profile Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.
4.10.3.4.2 Service Type
The Service Type of the Service Profile. The Service Type parameter is
configurable only when defining a new Service Profile (Add). It is not changeable.
The currently available Service Type options are:
1 – L2
2 – PPPoE
3 - Voice
For more details refer to Service Types on page 151.
4.10.3.4.3 VPL ID
A Virtual Private Link ID to be used in the backbone behind the Base Station.
Available values are in the range of 0 to 4094 or null (empty string) for No VPL ID.
A value of 4095 is displayed for No VPL ID.
Refer to Using VLANs on page 154 for guidelines regarding VPL ID configuration.
BreezeMAX System Manual
160
Services Menu
4.10.3.4.4 Priority Marking Mode
In some cases, the network operator may want to use the BreezeMAX system for
marking QoS classes, in order to provide network-wide QoS and enable the
upstream network to handle the traffic accordingly. Within the BreezeMAX
system, frames can be classified to QoS classes using Priority Classifiers, based
on either a DSCP header or 802,1p tag. This applies only in cases where an
external networking device marks the applicable fields. BreezeMax also enables
marking data transmitted to the backbone network with either DSCP or 802.1p
values, where the marking is done per Service Profile. This marking overrides
marking performed by external devices behind the SU. Typically, Priority Marking
by the NPU/µBST will be used in the following cases:
The external networking equipment behind the SU does not use priority
marking.
The service provider does not trust the priority marking defined by the user’s
equipment.
The service provider uses a priority marking type (DSCP or 802.1p) that differs
from the one used by the user’s networking equipment.
The system supports three marking modes:
1
Transparent Marking Mode (No Priority Marking): In this case, the system
should forward the frames to the uplink network without any changes.
If 802.1p classification is used at the SU, the frames will be transmitted to the
operator’s network with their original 802.1p value and the configured VPL ID.
If no VPL ID is configured (VPL ID = Null), the 802.1p tags will not be
forwarded.
For DSCP classification at the SU, if the VPL ID is configured, the NPU/Micro
Base Station adds an 802.1Q header with the configured VPL ID and
802.1p=0. Note that there may be a disparity between the DSCP values and
the default 802.1p = 0 value.
2
802.1p Marking Mode: All frames are marked with the configured VPL ID
and 802.1p Marking Value. If no VPL ID is configured (VPL ID = None), the
802.1Q header will include a VLAN ID = 0.
If 802.1p classification is used at the SU, the original 802.1p tags are replaced
by the configured 802.1p Marking Value.
If DSCP classification is used at the SU, an 802.1Q header is added, with the
configured VPL ID and 802.1p Marking Value, and the original DSCP bits are
kept.
BreezeMAX System Manual
161
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
3
DSCP Marking Mode: All frames are marked with the configured DSCP
Marking Values.
If 802.1p classification is used at the SU, the frames will be transmitted to the
operator’s network with their original 802.1p value and the configured VPL ID.
If no VPL ID is configured (VPL ID = Null), the original 802.1p tags will not be
forwarded.
If DSCP classification is used at the SU, the original DSCP bits will be
replaced by the configured DSCP Marking Value.
NOTE
PPPoE frames can be marked only with 802.1p. DSCP marking for PPPoE services is not
supported.
In L2 Services, many protocols may be carried over Ethernet. As BreezeMAX bridges all these
protocols, there’s no way to know what protocol type is encapsulated in Ethernet beforehand.
Consequently, if DSCP Marking is configured for L2, the BreezeMAX system uses DSCP
marking only for IP packets (e.g. Ethertype 0x0800). If 802.1p Marking is configured, it is used
for all frames.
4.10.3.4.5 Priority Marking Value
The Priority Marking Value enables definition of the marking value for data
frames transmitted to the backbone, according to the configured Priority Marking
Mode:
Table 4-6: Priority Marking Values
Priority Marking Mode
Priority Marking Values Range
Transparent
Not Applicable
802.1p
0-7
DSCP
0 - 63
4.10.3.4.6 Forwarding Rule
The Forwarding Rule to be used by the Service Profile.
The Forwarding Rule must be one of the names that exist in the database after
being defined using the Forwarding Rule menu. The Service Type defined in the
selected Forwarding Rule must match the one defined for the Service Profile.
4.10.3.4.7 Priority Classifier (L2 and PPPoE Service Type)
The Priority Classifier to be used by the Service Profile. Not applicable for Voice
Services.
The Priority Classifier must be one of the names that exist in the database, after
being defined using the Priority Classifier menu.
BreezeMAX System Manual
162
Services Menu
4.10.3.4.8 Maximum Number of Voice Calls (L2 and Voice Service
Type)
The Maximum Number of Voice Calls parameter sets the upper limit on the
number of simultaneous VoIP calls that can be supported by the Service using
the Service Profile. This parameter is applicable only for L2 and Voice Service
Profiles.
The available range is from 0 to 10 calls.
NOTE
To properly support Call Waiting, the Maximum Number of Voice Calls should be configured to a
value that is twice the number of actual voice sessions that can be supported simultaneously.
4.10.3.5
Forwarding Rule
The Forwarding Rule defines the features that affect forwarding and switching of
data. Data in L2 and Voice services may be switched only between the Services
that share the same Forwarding Rule. Data in PPPoE service can pass only
between the subscriber and an Access Concentrator behind the Base Station.
The Forwarding Rule menu enables defining new Forwarding Rules, viewing or
editing details of previously defined Forwarding Rules and removing Forwarding
Rules from the database.
The configurable Forwarding Rule’s parameters are:
4.10.3.5.1 Forwarding Rule Name
A Forwarding Rule Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.
4.10.3.5.2 Service Type
The Service Type for which the Forwarding Rule is defined. The Service Type
parameter is configurable only when defining a new Service Profile (Add). It is not
changeable.
The currently available Service Type options are:
1 – L2
2 – PPPoE
3 - Voice
For more details refer to Service Types on page 151.
4.10.3.5.3 Unicast Relaying (L2 and Voice Service Type)
The Unicast Relaying parameter determines whether the AU performs unicast
relaying. When the Unicast Relaying parameter is enabled, unicast packets
originating from devices on the wireless link can be transmitted back to the
BreezeMAX System Manual
163
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
wireless link devices. If disabled, these packets are not sent to the wireless link
even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link.
4.10.3.5.4 Broadcast Relaying (L2 and Voice Service Type)
The Broadcast Relaying parameter determines whether the AU performs
broadcast relaying. When the Broadcast Relaying parameter is enabled,
broadcast packets originating from devices on the wireless link are transmitted by
the AU back to the wireless link devices, as well as to the backbone. If disabled,
these packets are sent only to the backbone and are not sent back to the wireless
link.
4.10.3.5.5 Unknown Forwarding Policy (L2 and Voice Services Type)
The Unknown Forwarding Policy parameter determines the mode of controlling
the flow of information from the backbone to the wireless media. Select from the
following options:
1 – Reject: The AU will transmit packets only to those addresses that the AU
knows to exist on the wireless link side.
2 – Forward: Enables the transmission of all packets, except those sent to
addresses that the AU recognizes as being on its wired backbone side.
4.10.3.5.6 Multicast VLAN ID
The VLAN ID to be attached to mulicast messages in order to enable full support
of the VLAN feature.
Available values are in the range of 0 to 4094 or null (empty string) for No
Multicast VLAN ID.
Refer to Using VLANs on page 154 for guidelines regarding configuration of
Multicast VLAN ID.
4.10.3.5.7 Multicast QoS Profile
The QoS Profile to be used for mulicast and broadcast messages.
The QoS Profile must be one of the names that exist in the database after being
defined using the QoS Profile menu.
4.10.3.6
Priority Classifier (L2 and PPPoE Service Type)
The Priority Classifier defines the QoS Profiles to be allocated to users/sessions
differentiated by DSCP or 802.1p priority classifiers. Priority Classifiers are not
applicable to Voice Service Profiles.
Each Priority Classifier can define up to 4 uplink and 4 downlink QoS profiles.
BreezeMAX System Manual
164
Services Menu
NOTE
DSCP based Priority Classifiers are applicable only to IP or ARP traffic. It is not applicable to
PPPoE and other Ethernet type traffic.
If a Priority Classifier is not applicable for a certain traffic (e.g. DSCP based profile with PPPoE
traffic or 802.1p based profile with traffic that do not use VLAN tags), no prioritization scheme will
be in effect and quality of service will be determined by the first QoS Profile in the applicable lists.
The Priority Classifier menu enables defining new Priority Classifiers, viewing or
editing details of previously defined Priority Classifiers and removing Priority
Classifiers from the database.
The configurable Priority Classifier’s parameters are:
4.10.3.6.1 Priority Classifier Name
A Priority Classifier Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.
4.10.3.6.2 Priority Type
The prioritization mechanism used by the Priority Classifier.
The available options are:
1 – DSCP
2 – 802.1p
4.10.3.6.3 Uplink Upper Priority Limits
The Uplink Upper Priority Limits parameter enables to define up to four ranges,
where each range may be assigned a different QoS Profile for uplink
communication. The list includes up to 4 numbers separated by commas, where
each number must be higher than its predecessor and the last number must be
the highest available for the applicable priority type (7 for 802.1p, 63 for DSCP).
Examples for acceptable lists:
DSCP Priority: [10,30,50,63]; [21,42,63]; [20,63]; [63].
802.1p Priority: [2,4,6,7]; [1,5,7]; [6,7]; [7].
A ranges list of 21,42,63 means that packets with a priority from 0 to 21 will be
transmitted using the first QoS Profile defined in the Uplink QoS Profiles list (see
below), packets with a priority from 22 to 42 will be transmitted using the second
QoS Profile defined in the Uplink QoS Profiles list and packets with a priority
higher than 42 (43-63) will be transmitted using the third Uplink QoS Profile.
A ranges list that includes a single entry (63 for DSCP and 7 for 802.1p) means
that priority based classification is not used.
BreezeMAX System Manual
165
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.10.3.6.4 Uplink QoS Profiles
The Uplink QoS Profiles parameter enables to define up to four QoS Profiles,
where each entry is the QoS Profile associated with the applicable entry in the
Uplink Upper Priority Limits list. The list includes up to four QoS Profile Names,
where each name must be one of the names that exist in the database after being
defined using the QoS Profile menu. Each entry in the Uplink QoS Profiles list is
associated with the applicable entry in the Uplink Priority Ranges list.
4.10.3.6.5 Downlink Upper Priority Limits
The DownLink Upper Priority Limits list functionality is the same as that of the
Uplink Upper Priority Limits list, except that the ranges are defined for downlink
communication.
4.10.3.6.6 Downlink QoS Profiles
The Downlink QoS Profiles list functionality is the same as that of the Uplink QoS
Profiles list, except that the QoS Profiles are associated with the entries in the
Downlink Upper Priority Limits list.
4.10.3.7
QoS Profile
The QoS Profile defines the Quality of Service parameters that are applicable
when the QoS Profile is used.
Different QoS Profile Types are available to support different service
requirements:
Real-Time (RT): The Real-Time polling service is designed to meet the needs
of Real Time Variable Bit Rate like services characterized by requirements for
guaranteed rate and delay such as streaming video or audio. These services
are dynamic in nature, but offer periodic dedicated requests opportunities to
meet real-time requirements. Because the Subscriber Unit issues explicit
requests, the protocol overhead and latency is increased, but capacity is
granted only according to the real needs of the connection. QoS Profile
parameters include Committed Information Rate (CIR) and Committed Time
(CT).
Non-Real-Time (NRT): Non-Real-Time polling service is very similar to the
Real-Time polling service except that connections may utilize random access
transmit opportunities for sending bandwidth requests. These Non Real Time
Variable Bit Rate services, such as file transfer and Internet access with a
minimum guaranteed rate, are characterized by requirement for a guaranteed
rate, but can tolerate longer delays and are rather insensitive to jitter. QoS
Profile parameters include Committed Information Rate (CIR), Committed
Time (CT) and Maximum Information Rate (MIR) that limits the rate so that
bandwidth intensive services will not expand to occupy the full bandwidth.
BreezeMAX System Manual
166
Services Menu
Best Effort (BE) service is for services where neither throughput nor delay
guarantees are provided. The Subscriber Unit sends requests for bandwidth in
either random access slots or dedicated transmission opportunities. The
occurrence of dedicated opportunities is subject to network load, and the
Subscriber Unit cannot rely on their presence. Service parameters include
Committed Time (CT) and Maximum Information Rate (MIR).
Continuous Grant (CG) service is tailored for carrying constant bit-rate (CBR)
real-time services characterized by fixed size data packets on a periodic basis
such as VoIP or E1/T1. The Base Station schedules regularly, in a preemptive
manner, grants of the size defined at connection setup, without an explicit
request from the Subscriber Unit. This eliminates the overhead and latency of
bandwidth requests in order to meet the delay and jitter requirements of the
underlying service. Service parameters include Packet Size (unsolicited grant
size) and Sampling Rate (grant interval).
The QoS Profile menu enables defining new QoS Profiles, viewing or editing
details of previously defined QoS Profiles and removing QoS Profiles from the
database.
The available QoS Profile parameters depend on the QoS Type. The configurable
QoS Profile’s parameters are:
4.10.3.7.1 QoS Profile Name
A QoS Profile Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.
4.10.3.7.2 QoS Type
The QoS Type that defines the QoS parameters that are applicable to the service.
The available options are:
1 – CG (Continuous Grant)
2 – RT (Real Time)
3 – NRT (Non real time)
4 – BE (Best Effort)
4.10.3.7.3 CT (RT, NRT and BE QoS Types)
The CT (Committed Time) parameter defines the time window over which the
information rate is averaged to ensure compliance with the CIR or MIR
parameter.
The available options are:
1 – Short
2 – Medium
BreezeMAX System Manual
167
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
3 – Long
The actual value in milliseconds for each of the three options varies according to
the QoS type.
Table 4-7: CT values
CT
BE
NRT
RT
Short
50mS
50mS
50mS
Medium
100mS
100mS
100mS
Long
1sec
1Sec
200mS
4.10.3.7.4 CIR (RT and NRT QoS Types)
CIR is the information transfer rate that the system is committed to transfer
under normal conditions. The rate is averaged over a minimum increment of
time, which is defined by the CT parameter.
The range is from 0 to 12,000 Kbps.
4.10.3.7.5 MIR (NRT and BE QoS Types)
MIR is the maximum information rate that the system will allow for the
connection. The rate is averaged over a minimum increment of time, which is
defined by the CT parameter.
The range is from 1 to 12,000 Kbps.
MIR cannot be lower than CIR (applicable to NRT QoS type).
4.10.3.7.6 Packet Size (CG QoS Type)
The Packet Size parameter defines the amount of data in Bytes that is expected
for each grant.
4.10.3.7.7 Sampling Rate (CG QoS Type)
The Sampling Rate parameter defines the time in milliseconds between two
successive grants (inter arrival time).
NOTE
Packet Size (in bits) x Sampling Rate (in seconds) should not exceed 12 Mbps.
BreezeMAX System Manual
168
Services Menu
4.10.4 Defining Services
The process of defining completely new Services should be done “from bottom
up”, as each entity in the process is defined using one or more “lower level”
entities.
To define a new Service “from scratch”:
1
Define the QoS profiles that should be available for the required Priority
Classifiers (Uplink/Downlink QoS Profiles) and for the required Forwarding
Rules (Multicast QoS Profile).
2
Define the Priority Classifiers that should be available for the required Service
Profiles. All QoS Profiles required for the Uplink/Downlink QoS profiles list
must be defined in advance.
3
Define the Forwarding Rules that should be available for the required Service
Profiles. The QoS Profiles required for the Multicast QoS Profile parameter
must be defined in advance.
4
Define the Service Profiles that should be available for the required Services.
All required Priority Classifiers and Forwarding Rules must be defined in
advance.
5
Define the relevant Subscribers.
6
Verify that all applicable SUs are defined.
7
Use existing Subscriber Name, SU MAC Address and Service Profile Name to
define the required Service.
Once there are various QoS Profiles, Priority Classifiers, Forwarding Rules,
Service Profiles, Subscribers and SUs in the database, you can skip one or more
of the steps 1 to 6.
4.10.5 Pre-configured Profiles
At manufacturing stage, each NPU is configured with a set of pre-configured
Profiles. Certain parameters of these Profiles may be modified to reflect specific
implementation requirements. When the software version is upgraded, these preconfigured Profiles will not be installed again in the NPU. This is to prevent
configuration problems from occurring if the modified Profiles differ from the
factory loaded Profiles.
Note that upon resetting to NPU/µBST to its default configuration (Set Factory
Defaults), pre-configured Profiles that were modified are not affected.
The pre-configured Service Profiles are:
BreezeMAX System Manual
169
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Basic L2 Internet Access – for basic Internet Access service with Best Effort
QoS, utilizing L2 Service Type. This is the recommended Default Service
Profile for Quick Mode.
Basic PPPoE Internet Access - for basic Internet Access service with Best
Effort QoS, utilizing PPPoE Service Type.
Gold, Silver and Bronze Teleworking – for teleworking applications with
different QoS requirements. The pre-configured Teleworking Services are
asymmetric: DL Rate > UL Rate.
Gold, Silver and Bronze LAN-to-LAN – for LAN-to LAN applications with
different QoS requirements. The pre-configured LAN-to-LAN Services are
symmetric: DL rate = UL rate.
VoIP Service Profiles – for DRAP-based gateways. Two pre-configured VoIP
service Profiles are defined; VoIP 1V for gateways with a single POTS interface,
and VoIP 2V for fully supporting gateways for 2 POTS interfaces.
Service Profiles for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP Devices:
1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729: 1 POTS, no Fax, G.729 codec with a
20 milliseconds sample interval, no priority marking.
1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729: 1 POTS, T.38 Fax, G.729 codec with a
20 milliseconds sample interval, DSCP priority marking.
1 POTS Basic VoIP G.711: 1 POTS, no Fax, G.711 codec with a
20 milliseconds sample interval, no priority marking.
1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711: 1 POTS, T.38 Fax, G.729 codec with a
20 milliseconds sample interval, DSCP priority marking.
For more details of defining Service Profiles for Generic (3rd party) VoIP devices,
refer to Appendix E - Defining Service Profiles for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP
Gateways.
Except for the Basic PPPoE Internet Access pre-configured Service Profiles, all
pre-configured Data Service Profiles use L2 Service Type to ensure transport of all
L2 and L3 protocol.
It is recommended to use the L2 Best Effort Internet Access pre-configured
Service Profile as the Default Data Service Profile in Quick Mode.
The following tables provide details on the pre-configured Service Profiles,
Forwarding Rules, Priority Classifiers and QoS Profiles.
BreezeMAX System Manual
170
Services Menu
Table 4-8: Pre-Configured Data Service Profiles
Name
Service
Type
VPL ID*
Forwarding Rule
Priority Classifier
Internet Access L2
L2
Null
Internet Access L2
BE Asymmetric
Internet Access
PPPoE
PPPoE
11
Internet Access
PPPoE
BE Asymmetric
Gold Teleworking
L2
12
Gold Teleworking
Gold Asymmetric
Silver Teleworking
L2
13
Silver Teleworking
Silver Asymmetric
Bronze Teleworking
L2
14
Bronze Teleworking
Bronze Asymmetric
Gold LAN-to-LAN
L2
15
Gold LAN-to-LAN
Gold Symmetric
Silver LAN-to-LAN
L2
16
Silver LAN-to-LAN
Silver Symmetric
Bronze LAN-to-LAN
L2
17
Bronze LAN-to-LAN
Bronze Symmetric
In all pre-configured Data Service Profiles, the Priority Marking Mode is set to
Transparent and the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is 0.
* VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance
with specific network implementation, taking into account the considerations
described in Using VLANs on page 154.
As Internet Access L2 is the recommended Default Data Service Profile, a VPL ID
= None is used to ensure availability of basic data services in Quick Mode.
BreezeMAX System Manual
171
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-9: Pre-Configured Forwarding Rules for Data Service
Name
Service
Type
Unicast
relaying
Broadcast
Relaying
Unknown
forwarding
Policy
Multicast
QoS
Multicast
VLAN*
Internet
Access L2
L2
Disable
Disable
Forward
BE 750
Null
Internet
Access
PPPoE
PPPoE
Disable
(hard
coded)
Disable
(hard
coded)
Forward
(hard coded)
BE 750
Null
Gold
Teleworking
L2
Disable
Disable
Forward
NRT
1500/1750
Null
Silver
L2
Disable
Disable
Forward
NRT
Null
Teleworking
Bronze
1000/1150
L2
Disable
Disable
Forward
Teleworking
NRT
Null
750/850
Gold LAN-toLAN
L2
Enable
Enable
Forward
NRT
1500/1750
Null
Silver LANto-LAN
L2
Enable
Enable
Forward
NRT
1000/1150
Null
Bronze LANto-LAN
L2
Enable
Enable
Forward
NRT
750/850
Null
* Multicast VLANs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in
accordance with specific network implementation, taking into account the
considerations described in Using VLANs on page 154.
BreezeMAX System Manual
172
Services Menu
Table 4-10: Pre-Configured Priority Classifiers for Data Services
Name
Type
Uplink
Priority
ranges
Uplink QoS
Profiles
Downlink
Priority
ranges
Downlink QoS
Profiles
BE Asymmetric
802.1p
7
BE 96
7
BE 750
Gold Asymmetric
802.1p
7
NRT 128/192
7
NRT 1500/1750
Silver Asymmetric
802.1p
7
NRT 96/128
7
NRT 1000/1150
Bronze Asymmetric
802.1p
7
NRT 96/128
7
NRT 750/850
Gold Symmetric
802.1p
7
NRT 1500/1750
7
NRT 1500/1750
Silver Symmetric
802.1p
7
NRT 1000/1150
7
NRT 1000/1150
Bronze Symmetric
802.1p
7
NRT 750/850
7
NRT 750/850
Table 4-11: Pre-Configured QoS Profiles for Data Services
Name
Type
CIR (Kbps)
MIR (Kbps)
CT
BE 96
Best Effort
NA
96
Medium
BE 750
Best Effort
NA
750
Medium
NRT 96/128
Non Real Time
96
128
Medium
NRT 128/192
Non Real Time
128
192
Medium
NRT 750/850
Non Real Time
750
850
Medium
NRT 1000/1150
Non Real Time
1000
1150
Medium
NRT 1500/1750
Non Real Time
1500
1750
Medium
BreezeMAX System Manual
173
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-12: Pre-Configured Voice Service Profiles (for DRAP-based Gateways)
Name
Service
Type
VPL ID*
Priority
Marking Mode
Maximum Number
of Voice Calls**
Forwarding
Rule
VoIP 1V
Voice
18
Transparent
2
VoIP
VoIP 2V
Voice
18
Transparent
4
VoIP
* VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance
with specific network implementation, taking into account the considerations
described in Using VLANs on page 154.
** To properly support Call Waiting, an additional connection must be available.
Thus, the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is twice the maximum expected
number of actual voice sessions.
Table 4-13: Pre-Configured Service Profiles for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP Services
Name
Service
Type
VPL ID*
Forwarding Rule
Priority Classifier
1 POTS Basic VoIP
G.729
L2
19
VoIP
1 POTS Basic VoIP
G.729
1 POTS Advanced
VoIP G.729
L2
19
VoIP
1 POTS Advanced
VoIP G.729
1 POTS Basic VoIP
L2
19
VoIP
1 POTS Basic VoIP
G.711
G.711
1 POTS Advanced
VoIP G.711
L2
19
VoIP
1 POTS Advanced
VoIP G.711
In all pre-configured Service Profiles for generic VoIP services, the Priority
Marking Mode is set to Transparent and the Maximum Number of Voice Calls
is 0.
* VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance
with specific network implementation, taking into account the considerations
described in Using VLANs on page 154.
BreezeMAX System Manual
174
Services Menu
Table 4-14: Pre-Configured Forwarding Rule for Voice Services
Name
Service
Type
Unicast
Relaying
Broadcast
Relaying
Unknown
forwarding
Policy
Multicast
QoS
Multicast
VLAN*
VoIP
Voice
Enable
(hard
coded)
Enable
(hard
coded)
Forward
(hard
coded)
BE 128
Null
* Multicast VLANs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in
accordance with specific network implementation, taking into account the
considerations described in Using VLANs on page 154.
All pre-configured Service profiles for VoIP (DRAP-based Voice Services and
Generic (3rd party) VoIP Services share the same pre-configured Forwarding Rule,
to enable direct communication between all users of VoIP Services, regardless of
the gateway type and other possible differences in the Service Profiles.
Table 4-15: Pre-Configured Priority Classifiers for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP
Services
Name
Type
Uplink
Priority
Ranges
Uplink QoS
Profiles
Downlink
Priority
Ranges
Downlink QoS
Profiles
1 POTS Basic
VoIP G.729
DSCP
63
CG 47
63
CG 47
1 POTS Advanced
DSCP
0
BE 64
0
BE 64
26
RT 6
26
RT 6
63
CG 38
63
CG 38
VoIP G.729
1 POTS Basic
VoIP G.711
DSCP
63
CG 108
63
CG 108
1 POTS Advanced
VoIP G.711
DSCP
0
BE 64
0
BE 64
26
RT 11
26
RT 11
63
CG 88
63
CG 88
BreezeMAX System Manual
175
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-16: Pre-Configured BE and RT QoS Profile for Voice Services
Name
Type
CIR (Kbps)
MIR (Kbps)
CT
BE 64
Best Effort
NA
64
Medium
BE 128
Best Effort
NA
128
Medium
RT 6
Real Time
6
NA
Short
RT 11
Real Time
11
NA
Short
Table 4-17: Pre-Configured CG QoS Profile for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP Services
Name
Type
Packet Size (Bytes)
Sample Interval (msec)
CG 38
Continuous Grant
94
20
CG 47
Continuous Grant
117
20
CG 88
Continuous Grant
218
20
CG 108
Continuous Grant
270
20
BreezeMAX System Manual
176
NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters Summary
4.11
NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters
Summary
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Base Station/µBST Configuration Parameters
Device Name
Up to 256 printable characters
Null
Yes
Device Location
Up to 256 printable characters
Null
Yes
Info
Yes
Base Station/µBST Alarms and Traps
Minimum Severity
1 – Critical
2 – Major
3 – Minor
4 – Warning
5 - Info
Days
1 – 31 days
31 days
Yes
Traps Group
Enable/Disable
Per Group (A, B):
Group A: Enable
Yes
1 – Disable
Broup B: Enable
2 – Enable
NPU/µBST Parameters
Password
Up to 16 printable characters,
admin
Yes
case sensitive
Monitor Inactivity
Timeout
1 – 60 minutes
10 minutes
Yes
Management Port
IP Address
IP address
10.0.0.1
No
Management Port
Subnet Mask
IP address
255.255.255.0
No
BreezeMAX System Manual
177
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Management Port
Gateway
IP address
0.0.0.0
No
Management Port
Destination Subnet
IP address
0.0.0.0
No
Management Port
Destination Subnet
Mask
IP address
0.0.0.0
No
Management Port
1 – Disable
Enable
No
Auto negotiation
Option (µBST)
2 – Enable
Management Port
1 – 10 Mbps Half Duplex
Speed and Duplex
(µBST)
2 – 10 Mbps Full duplex
No
3 – 100 Mbps Half Duplex
4 – 100 Mbps Full Duplex
Management Port
Management
Traffic
Enable/Disable
1 – Disable
Enable
No
Data Port IP
Address
IP address
1.1.1.3
No
Data Port Subnet
Mask
IP address
255.255.255.0
No
Data Port Gateway
IP address
0.0.0.0
No
Data Port
0-4094 or Null for No VLAN
Null
No
1 – 100 Mbps
100 Mbps
No
2 – Enable
Management
VLAN ID
Data Port Speed
(NPU)
2 – 1 Gbps
BreezeMAX System Manual
178
NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters Summary
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Data Port Auto
Negotiation Option
(µBST)
1 – Disable
Enable
No
Data Port Speed
and Duplex (µBST)
1 – 10 Mbps Half Duplex
2 – Enable
No
2 – 10 Mbps Full duplex
3 – 100 Mbps Half Duplex
4 – 100 Mbps Full Duplex
Data Port
Management
Traffic
Enable/Disable
1 – Disable
Enable
No
Authorized
IP address
NA
Yes
Authorized
1 – Disable
NA
Yes
Manager Send
Traps
2 – Enable
2 – Enable
Manager IP
Address
Authorized
Manager Read
Community
Up to 23 printable characters,
case sensitive
NA
Yes
Authorized
Manager Write
Community
Up to 23 printable characters,
case sensitive
NA
Yes
Bridge Aging Time
1 – 1440 minutes
10 minutes
Yes
186.190.0.0.0.0
No
Disable
No
AU/µBST MAC Parameters
Base Station ID
X.X.X.X.X.X
X: 0-255
ARQ
Enable/Disable
1 – Disable
2 – Enable
BreezeMAX System Manual
179
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Maximum Cell
Radius (km)
10 –100 km using 10 km steps
20 km
No
3.5
No
3551.75
No
28
Yes
Enable
Yes
AU/µBST Phy Parameters
Bandwidth (MHz)
1 – 1.75
2 – 3.5
Downlink (Tx)
Frequency (MHz)
For Band 3.5a and a Bandwidth
of 3.5 MHz: 3501.25 to 3551.75
in increments of 0.125 MHz.
For Band 3.5a and a Bandwidth
of 1.75 MHz: 3500.375 to
3552.625 in increments of 0.125
MHz.
For Band 3.5b and a Bandwidth
of 3.5 MHz: 3551.75 to 3598.25
in increments of 0.125 MHz.
For Band 3.5b and a Bandwidth
of 1.75 MHz: 3550.875 to
3599.125 in increments of 0.125
MHz.
Tx Power (dBm)
13 – 28 (dBm, in increments of
0.25 dBm)
AU/µBST Multirate Parameters
Multirate
Enable/Disable
1 – Disable
2 – Enable
Disable is temporary until next
reset
BreezeMAX System Manual
180
NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters Summary
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Uplink Basic Rate
1 – BPSK 1/2
BPSK 1/2
Yes
BPSK 1/2
Yes
Enable
Yes
-69
Yes
50
Yes
2 – BPSK 3/4
3 – QPSK 1/2
4 – QPSK 3/4
5 – QAM16 1/2
6 – QAM16 3/4
7 – QAM64 2/3
8 – QAM64 3/4
Downlink Basic
Rate
1 – BPSK 1/2
2 – BPSK 3/4
3 – QPSK 1/2
4 – QPSK 3/4
5 – QAM16 1/2
6 – QAM16 3/4
7 – QAM64 2/3
8 – QAM64 3/4
AU/µBST ATPC Parameters
ATPC
Enable/Disable
1 – Disable
2 – Enable
Disable is temporary until next
reset
Optimal Uplink
RSSI (dBm)
-103 to -50
AU/µBST Voice Parameters
Maximum Number
0 – 300
of Voice Calls
BreezeMAX System Manual
181
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
AU/µBST BER Test Parameters
SU MAC Address
MAC address
NA
Yes
Number of Bytes
1,000 – 100,000,000
NA
Yes
Rate
1 – BPSK 1/2
NA
Yes
2 – BPSK 3/4
3 – QPSK 1/2
4 – QPSK 3/4
5 – QAM16 1/2
6 – QAM16 3/4
7 – QAM64 2/3
8 – QAM64 3/4
Burst Size
500 – 4000 Bytes
NA
Yes
Test Priority
1 – RT
NA
Yes
Permanent
Yes
2 – NRT
3 – BE
SU Control Parameters
SU Status
1 – Permanent
2 – Temporary
SU Registration Parameters
Name
Read-only
NA
Organization
Name
Read-only
NA
Address
Read-only
NA
Country Code
Read-only
NA
BreezeMAX System Manual
182
NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters Summary
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
SU MAC Parameters
Base Station ID
X.X.X.X.X.X
No
X: 0 – 255
Base Station ID
Mask
X.X.X.X.X.X
No
X: 0 – 255
SU Phy Parameters
Bandwidth (MHz)
1 – 1.75
No
2 – 3.5
Uplink (Tx)
Frequency (MHz)
No
BW 3.5 MHz: 3401.25 to
3498.25
BW 1.75 MHz: 3400.375 to
3499.125
Resolution: increments of
0.125 MHz
SU Multirate and ATPC Parameters
Uplink Rate
Applicable only if Multirate in AU
New SU: Uplink
is disabled:
Basic Rate.
1 – BPSK 1/2
Connected SU: Last
used rate.
2 – BPSK 3/4
Yes
3 – QPSK 1/2
4 – QPSK 3/4
5 – QAM16 1/2
6 – QAM16 3/4
7 – QAM64 2/3
8 – QAM64 3/4
BreezeMAX System Manual
183
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Auto Negotiation
No
installer
Yes
Disable
Yes
SU Ethernet Port Parameters
Ethernet Port
Configuration
1 – 10 Mbps Half Duplex
2 – 10 Mbps Full duplex
3 – 100 Mbps Half Duplex
4 – 100 Mbps Full Duplex
5 – Auto Negotiation
SU Password
Password
Up to 20 printable characters,
case sensitive
SU Bridging Parameters
Enable/Disable
1 – Disable
Limit on Number of
Supported Devices
2 – Enable
Maximum Number
1 – 512
512
Yes
1 – 1440 minutes
3 minutes
Yes
Quick
Yes
of Supported
Devices
Bridge Aging Time
Service General Parameters
Service Mode
1 – Advanced
2 – Quick
Default Data
Service Profile
Name of an existing profile or
None.
Internet Access L2
Yes
Default Voice
Service Profile
Name of an existing profile or
None.
None
Yes
BreezeMAX System Manual
184
NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters Summary
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Service Subscribers Parameters
Subscriber Name
Up to 32 printable characters.
Must be unique in the network.
Yes
First Name
Up to 50 printable characters.
Yes
Last Name
Up to 50 printable characters.
Yes
Description
Up to 50 printable characters.
Yes
Admin Status
1 – Disabled
Yes
2 – Enabled
Service Parameters
Service Name
Up to 32 printable characters.
Yes
Subscriber Name
A Subscriber Name (up to 32
printable characters) that exists
in the database
Yes
SU MAC Address
MAC Address of an SU that
exists in the database
Yes
Service Profile
Name
A Service Profile Name (up to 32
printable characters) that exists
in the database
Yes
VLAN List
A list of different numbers
Yes
separated by commas where
each entry is from 1 to 4094. Null
is for No VLAN.
Admin Status
1 – Disabled
Yes
2 – Enabled
BreezeMAX System Manual
185
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Service Profile Parameters
Service Profile
Name
Up to 32 printable characters.
Yes
Service Type
Applicable only for new Service
Profiles (Add):
Yes
1 – L2
2 – PPPoE
3 - Voice
VPL ID
0 – 4094 or null for No VPL ID.
Priority Marking
1 – Transparent
Mode
Yes
2 – 802.1p
3 - DSCP
Priority Marking
Value
802.1p: 0 – 7
Forwarding Rule
A Forwarding Rule Name (up to
32 printable characters) that
exists in the database
Yes
Priority Classifier
A Priority Classifier Name (up to
32 printable characters) that
exists in the database
Yes
Maximum Number
of Voice Calls
0 – 10
Yes
DSCP: 0 - 63
Forwarding Rule Parameters
Forwarding Rule
Up to 32 printable characters
Yes
Name
BreezeMAX System Manual
186
NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters Summary
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Service Type
Applicable only for new Service
Profiles (Add):
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Yes
1 – L2
2 – PPPoE
Unicast Relaying
Applicable only for L2 Service
Yes
type:
1 – Disabled
2 – Enabled
Broadcast
Relaying
Applicable only for L2 Service
type:
Yes
1 – Disabled
2 - Enabled
Unknown
Applicable only for L2 Service
Forwarding Policy
type:
Yes
1 – Reject
2 – Forward
Multicast VLAN ID
0 – 4094 or null for No Multicast
VLAN.
Yes
Multicast QoS
Profile
A QoS Profile Name (up to 32
printable characters) that exists
in the database
Yes
Priority Classifier Parameters
Priority Classifier
Up to 32 printable characters
Yes
1 – DSCP
Yes
Name
Priority Type
2 – 802.1p
BreezeMAX System Manual
187
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Uplink Priority
Ranges
Up to 4 numbers separated by
commas, where each number
must be higher than its
predecessor and the last number
must be the highest available for
the applicable priority type (7 for
802.1p, 63 for DSCP).
Yes
Uplink QoS
Profiles
Up to four QoS Profile Names
separated by commas, where
each name (up to 32 printable
characters) is a name of a QoS
Profile that exists in the
database. The number of entries
in the list must be identical to
number of entries in Uplink
Priority Ranges list.
Yes
Downlink Priority
Ranges
Up to 4 numbers separated by
commas, where each number
must be higher than its
predecessor and the last number
must be the highest available for
the applicable priority type (7 for
802.1p, 63 for DSCP).
Yes
Downlink QoS
Up to four QoS Profile Names
Yes
Profiles
separated by commas, where
each name (up to 32 printable
characters) is a name of a QoS
Profile that exists in the
database. The number of entries
in the list must be identical to
number of entries in Downlink
Priority Ranges list.
BreezeMAX System Manual
188
NPU/Micro Base Station Parameters Summary
Table 4-18: NPU/µBST Monitor Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
QoS Profile Parameters
QoS Profile Name
Up to 32 printable characters
Yes
QoS Type
2 – RT
Yes
3 – NRT
4 – BE
CT
1 – Short
Yes
2 – Medium
3 – Long
CIR (Kbps)
Applicable to RT and NRT:
Yes
0 – 12,000
MIR (Kbps)
Applicable to NRT and BE:
1 – 12,000. MIR cannot be lower
than CIR (NRT)
Yes
Packet Size
(Bytes)
Applicable to CG
Yes
Sample Interval
Applicable to CG
Yes
(msec)
BreezeMAX System Manual
189
A
Appendix A - Preparing the SU IDU-ODU
Cable
Appendix A - Preparing the SU IDU-ODU Cable
The Indoor-to-Outdoor cable provides pin-to-pin connection on both ends.
Figure A-1 shows the wire pair connections required for the Indoor-to-Outdoor
cable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4+5
1+2
7+8
3+6
Figure A-1: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments
The color codes used in cables supplied by Alvarion with crimped connectors are
as listed in Table A-1:
Table A-1: Cable Color Codes
Wire color
Pin
Blue
1
Blue/white
2
Orange
3
Orange/white
6
Brown
4
Brown/white
5
Green
7
Green/white
8
BreezeMAX System Manual
192
The SU Installer Monitor Program
Use a crimp tool for RJ-45 connectors to prepare the wires, insert them into the
appropriate pins and use the crimp tool to crimp the connector. Make sure to do
the following:
1
Remove as small a length as possible of the external jacket. Verify that the
external jacket is well inside the service box to ensure good sealing.
2
Take back the shield drain wire before inserting the cable into the RJ-45
connector, to ensure a good connection with the connector's shield after
crimping.
BreezeMAX System Manual
193
B
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer
Monitor Program
In This Appendix:
The SU Installer Monitor Program, page 196
Using the Monitor Program, page 197
The Main Menu, page 199
Unit Control Menu, page 201
Registration Parameters Menu, page 210
Base Station ID Parameters Menu, page 212
Radio Parameters Menu, page 215
Performance Monitoring Menu, page 217
Multirate and ATPC Parameters Menu, page 221
SU Parameters Summary, page 223
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
B.1
The SU Installer Monitor Program
The SU Installer Monitor program enables configuration of basic parameters
during installation to facilitate communication with the AU, including all
parameters required for completion of the Network Entry process. It also enables
downloading of SW files, control of the running SW version, and
downloading/uploading of the configuration file, enabling simplified and faster
configuration process.
The SU Installer Monitor program also provides a selection of performance
monitoring capabilities, allowing installers and technicians to view information on
link quality and traffic counters. These monitoring capabilities enable
performance verification and problem identification.
To further support local testing, the program also enables temporary control of
the ATPC and Multirate mechanisms.
BreezeMAX System Manual
196
Using the Monitor Program
B.2
Using the Monitor Program
B.2.1
Accessing the Monitor Program
To access the Monitor program:
1
The Monitor program uses the fixed IP address 192.168.254.251. with the
subnet mask 255.255.255.0. The PC used for accessing the Monitor program
should be configured accordingly. It is recommended to set the PC’s IP
address to 192.168.254.250, which is the default TFTP Server IP address
(required for downloading SW versions and for downloading/uploading
configuration files.
NOTE
The IP address 192.168.254.251 is used only for the Monitor program. This is not the IP address
used by the unit for other purposes. The IP parameters for management purposes are allocated by
the NPU during the Network Entry process.
2
Connect the PC to the Ethernet port, using a straight cable.
3
Run the Telnet program connecting to 192.168.254.251. The Enter the
passwod prompt is displayed. Enter the password and press the Enter key.
NOTE
Following three consecutive failures to enter the correct password, access to the Monitor program
will be blocked for 5 minutes.
The factory default password is “installer”.
If you forgot the password, type “help” to receive a challenge string consisting of 24 characters.
Contact Alvarion’s Customer Service and provide the challenge string (after user identification) to
receive a temporary password. You can use this password only once to enter the program. The
password must be changed during the session to a different “permanent” password. The
administrator should be notified of this new password. Five consecutive errors in entering the
temporary password will invalidate it. In this case, repeat this procedure to receive a new challenge
string for a new temporary password.
4
B.2.2
The Main menu of the SU Installer Monitor program is displayed, enabling
you to access the required parameters configuration and performance
monitoring options.
Using the Program
This section describes the Monitor program structure and navigation rules.
Each menu or submenu displays a list of numbered options. To access an
option, enter the number of the required option at the > prompt and press the
Enter key.
The header of each displayed item includes the unit identification (MAC
Address), the running SW version and the name of the current item.
BreezeMAX System Manual
197
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
The first selectable item in each menu is the Show option, enabling to view
the current configuration of the applicable parameters. For some menus some
additional status information is displayed.
At any point in the program, you can use the Esc key to return to the previous
menu (one level up) without applying any change.
Configurable parameter’s menu displays the current value/status of the
parameter and provides instructions related to configuration changes. These
instructions may include the permitted value range for the parameter, the
permitted format or the selectable options.
Each change in a parameter’s configuration must be confirmed using the
Enter key. If the new value/option is a valid one, the program will return to
the previous menu. Entry of a wrong value will be indicated by an appropriate
error message, and the configuration change text will be displayed again.
Changes to certain parameters are applied only after reset. For these
parameters, the applicable Show menus display both Current and Configured
values.
If the Monitor program is not used for 10 minutes, the session will be
terminated automatically.
Select the Exit option in the Main menu to exit the program and terminate the
session.
BreezeMAX System Manual
198
The Main Menu
B.3
The Main Menu
The Main menu of the SU Installer Program includes the following options:
Show All Parameters and Status
Unit Control
Registration Parameters
Base Station ID Parameters
Radio Parameters
Performance Monitoring
Multirate and ATPC Parameters
Exit
B.3.1
Show All Parameters and Status
Select this option to view the current values/selected option of all parameters as
well as additional status information. The display includes all the items listed in
the descriptions of the Show option in the sections explaining the Unit Control,
Registration Parameters, Base Station ID Parameters, Radio Parameters and
Multirate and ATPC Parameters menus.
B.3.2
Unit Control
The Unit Control menu enables resetting the unit, reverting to the default
configuration, changing the password, configuring the operation mode of the
Ethernet port, and selecting the running SW version. It also enables to download
a new SW version.
B.3.3
Registration Parameters
The Registration Parameters menu enables configuring registration parameters
that are required for services provisioning to the unit.
B.3.4
Base Station ID Parameters
The Base Station ID Parameters menu enables to configure the parameters that
define the AU(s) with which the unit can synchronize.
BreezeMAX System Manual
199
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
B.3.5
Radio Parameters
The Radio Parameters menu enables configuring the basic radio parameters
necessary to facilitate communication with the Base Station.
B.3.6
Performance Monitoring
The Performance Monitoring menu enables viewing continuously updated link
quality parameters and traffic counters.
B.3.7
MultiRate and ATPC Parameters
The Multirate and ATPC Parameters menu enables temporary control on the
transmitted signal for testing purposes.
B.3.8
Exit
Select the Exit option to exit the Monitor program and terminate the Telnet
session.
BreezeMAX System Manual
200
Unit Control Menu
B.4
Unit Control Menu
The Unit Control menu includes the following options:
Show
Reset Unit
Change Password
SW Versions Control
Configuration Control
Ethernet Port Operation Mode
B.4.1
Show
Select this option to view the current values/selected option of applicable
parameters as well as general status information, as follows:
SW Versions:
Main SW File Name
Main SW Version
Shadow SW File Name
Shadow SW Version
Running from: indicates whether the unit is running now the Main or the
Shadow version.
Upload/Download Parameters:
TFTP Server IP address: the IP address of the TFTP server used for SW
version download and for Configuration File Download/Upload.
SW File Name: the name in the TFTP server of the SW version to be
downloaded to the unit.
Configuration File Download Name: the name in the TFTP server of the
configuration file to be downloaded to the unit.
BreezeMAX System Manual
201
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
Configuration File Upload Name: the name in the TFTP server of the
configuration file to be uploaded from the unit.
Ethernet Port Operation Mode parameters and status:
Current Eth Mode: the actual operation mode of the Ethernet port.
Configured Eth Mode: the configured operation mode of the Ethernet port.
Detected Eth Mode: the actual speed and duplex parameters of the
Ethernet port.
HW Versions:
ODU HW Version: The version of the ODU’s digital module
ODU HW Configuration
ODU RF Version: The version of the ODU’s radio module
Unit Status: the connectivity status of the unit. Possible statuses are:
Searching for Base Station
Base Station Found
Not Authorized
Not Registered
Registered
B.4.2
Reset Unit
Select this option to reset the unit. To avoid unintentional reset, you will be
prompted to confirm the reset request. Changes to most of the configurable
parameters are applied only after reset. Refer to SU's Parameters Summary on
page 152 for information on which parameters are changeable in run time and
which changes are applied only after reset.
B.4.3
Change Password
Select this option to change the password. You will be prompted to enter the new
password. After pressing enter, you will be prompted to re-enter the new
password.
BreezeMAX System Manual
202
Unit Control Menu
NOTE
Notify the administrator of the new password!
Valid passwords: Up to 20 printable characters.
Default password: installer
B.4.4
SW Versions Control
The SU can contain two SW versions:
Main: Each time the SU resets it will reboot using the version defined as
Main.
Shadow: Normally, the Shadow version is the backup version. Each time a
new SW File is downloaded to the SU, it will be stored as a Shadow version,
replacing the previous Shadow version.
The typical process of upgrading to a new SW version includes the following
steps:
1
Download the new SW File to the SU. It will be stored as the Shadow version.
2
Reset and run the unit from its Shadow version. Note that at this stage, after
reset the unit will reboot from its previous Main version.
3
If you want to continue using the new version, swap the Shadow and Main
versions. The new version is now defined as Main, and will be used each time
the unit reboots. The previous version is defined now as Shadow.
The SU functions as a TFTP client, enabling loading of SW files from a TFTP
server.
The SW Versions Control submenu includes the following options:
Show
Reset and Run from Shadow
Set Running Version as Main
SW Download Parameters
Perform SW Download
BreezeMAX System Manual
203
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
B.4.4.1
Show
Select this option to view the current available versions and the running version
as well as the TFTP parameters:
SW Versions:
Main SW File Name
Main SW Version
Shadow SW File Name
Shadow SW Version
Running from: indicates whether the unit is running now the Main or the
Shadow version.
Download/Upload Parameters:
TFTP Server IP address: the IP address of the TFTP server used for SW
version download and for Configuration File Download/Upload.
SW File Name: the name in the TFTP server of the SW version to be
downloaded to the unit.
B.4.4.2
Reset and Run from Shadow
Select this option to reset the unit and run the Shadow version after power up. To
avoid unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request.
B.4.4.3
Set Running Version as Main
When the unit is running the Shadow version (after selecting Reset and Run from
Shadow), it will boot from the Main version after the next reset. Select this option
if you want to swap versions so that the running version will become the Main
version and will be the version to be used after reset. To avoid unintentional
actions you will be prompted to confirm the request.
B.4.4.4
SW Download Parameters
This submenu enables viewing or defining the parameters to be used for
downloading a new SW version from a TFTP server. It includes the following
options:
Show
BreezeMAX System Manual
204
Unit Control Menu
TFTP Server IP Address
SW File Name
B.4.4.4.1 Show
Select this option to view the current SW Download parameters:
TFTP Server IP address: the IP address of the TFTP server used for SW version
download.
SW File Name: the name in the TFTP server of the SW version to be
downloaded to the unit.
B.4.4.4.2 TFTP Server IP Address
Select this option to change the IP address of the TFTP server.
The default TFTP Server IP address is 192.168.254.250.
NOTE
1. When the SU is synchronized with a base station, it receives the TFTP Server IP Address from
the base station during the network entry process. This address is 1.7.1.1 for a Base Station (NPU)
and 1.1.1.1 for a Micro Base Station. This will be the TFTP Server IP Address after each reset, as
long as the SU is associated with a base station.
2. The same TFTP Server IP Address parameter is used in the SW Download, Configuration File
Download and Configuration File Upload processes.
B.4.4.4.3 SW File Name
Select this option to enter the name in the TFTP server of the required SW file.
B.4.4.5
Perform SW Download
Select this option to execute the SW download operation. To avoid unintentional
actions you will be prompted to confirm the request.
To perform SW download:
1
The required SW file should be available in the TFTP Server directory in a PC
connected to the unit.
2
Typically it is recommended to configure the IP address of the PC to
192.168.154.250, which is the default TFTP Server IP address of the unit. If a
different IP address is configured in the PC with the TFTP server, configure
the TFTP Server IP address to the same address.
3
Enter the name of the SW file (as called in the TFTP server) as the SW File
Name.
BreezeMAX System Manual
205
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
4
Select Perform SW Download and confirm the download request. Wait to
receive a success/failure message.
5
Following a successful download, the loaded SW version becomes the Shadow
version in the unit.
B.4.5
Configuration Control
The Configuration Control Submenu includes the following options:
Set Factory Defaults
Configuration File Download Control
Configuration File Upload Control
B.4.5.1
Set Factory Defaults
Select this option to reset the unit and revert to the default configuration. To
avoid unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request. All
parameters except the Password will revert to the factory default values.
B.4.5.2
Configuration File Download Control
The Configuration File Download Control submenu enables to define parameters
related to downloading a configuration file from a TFTP server to the SU, and to
initiate the download operation. It includes the following options:
Show
TFTP Server IP Address
Configuration File Download Name
Perform Configuration Download
B.4.5.2.1 Show
Select this option to view the current Configuration File Download parameters:
TFTP Server IP address: the IP address of the TFTP server used for
configuration file download.
Configuration File Download Name: the name in the TFTP server of the
configuration file to be downloaded to the unit.
BreezeMAX System Manual
206
Unit Control Menu
B.4.5.2.2 TFTP Server IP Address
Select this option to change the IP address of the TFTP server.
The default TFTP Server IP address is 192.168.254.250.
NOTE
1. When the SU is synchronized with a base station, it receives the TFTP Server IP Address from
the base station during the network entry process. This address is 1.7.1.1 for a Base Station (NPU)
and 1.1.1.1 for a Micro Base Station. This will be the TFTP Server IP Address after each reset, as
long as the SU is associated with a base station.
2. The same TFTP Server IP Address parameter is used in the SW Download, Configuration File
Download and Configuration File Upload processes.
B.4.5.2.3 Configuration File Download Name
Select this option to enter the name in the TFTP server of the required
configuration file. A Configuration File Download Name consists of up to 50
characters.
The default Configuration File Download Name is SU_DOWNLOAD_CFG.
B.4.5.2.4 Perform Configuration Download
Select this option to execute the configuration file download operation. To avoid
unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request.
To perform configuration file download:
1
The required configuration file should be available in the TFTP Server
directory in a PC connected to the unit.
2
Typically it is recommended to configure the IP address of the PC to
192.168.154.250, which is the default TFTP Server IP address of the unit. If a
different IP address is configured in the PC with the TFTP server, configure
the TFTP Server IP address to the same address.
3
Enter the name of the configuration file (as called in the TFTP server) as the
Configuration File Download Name.
B.4.5.3
4
Select Perform Configuration Download and confirm the download request.
Wait to receive a success/failure message.
5
Following a successful download, reset the unit to apply the new
configuration.
Configuration File Upload Control
The Configuration File Upload Control submenu enables to define parameters
related to uploading the configuration of the SU to a file in the TFTP server
directory, and to initiate the upload operation. It includes the following options:
Show
BreezeMAX System Manual
207
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
TFTP Server IP Address
Configuration File Upload Name
Perform Configuration Upload
B.4.5.3.1 Show
Select this option to view the current Configuration File Upload parameters:
TFTP Server IP address: the IP address of the TFTP server used for
configuration file upload.
Configuration File Upload Name: the name in the TFTP server directory of the
configuration file to be uploaded.
B.4.5.3.2 TFTP Server IP Address
Select this option to change the IP address of the TFTP server.
The default TFTP Server IP address is 192.168.254.250.
NOTE
1. When the SU is synchronized with a base station, it receives the TFTP Server IP Address from
the base station during the network entry process. This address is 1.7.1.1 for a Base Station (NPU)
and 1.1.1.1 for a Micro Base Station. This will be the TFTP Server IP Address after each reset, as
long as the SU is associated with a base station.
2. The same TFTP Server IP Address parameter is used in the SW Download, Configuration File
Download and Configuration File Upload processes.
B.4.5.3.3 Configuration File Upload Name
Select this option to enter the name in the TFTP server directory of the
configuration file to be uploaded. A Configuration File Upload Name consists of
up to 50 characters.
The default Configuration File Upload Name is SU_UPLOAD_CFG.
B.4.5.3.4 Perform Configuration Upload
Select this option to execute the configuration file upload operation. To avoid
unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request.
To perform configuration file upload:
1
Typically it is recommended to configure the IP address of the PC to
192.168.154.250, which is the default TFTP Server IP address of the unit. If a
different IP address is configured in the PC with the TFTP server, configure
the TFTP Server IP address to the same address.
BreezeMAX System Manual
208
Unit Control Menu
2
Enter the name of the configuration file (as will be called in the TFTP server)
as the Configuration File Upload Name.
3
Select Perform Configuration Upload and confirm the dupload request. Wait
to receive a success/failure message.
B.4.6
Ethernet Port Operation Mode
The Ethernet Port Control parameter enables viewing and defining the operation
mode of the Ethernet port
The available options are:
Show Ethernet Mode
Auto Negotiation
100 Mbps, Full-Duplex
100 Mbps, Half-Duplex
10 Mbps, Full-Duplex
10 Mbps, Half-Duplex
The default is Auto-Negotiation.
Upon selecting the Show Ethernet Mode option, the configured and actual values
are displayed:
Current Eth Mode: the actual operation mode of the Ethernet port.
Configured Eth Mode: the configured operation mode of the Ethernet port.
Detected Eth Mode: the actual speed and duplex parameters of the Ethernet
port.
BreezeMAX System Manual
209
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
B.5
Registration Parameters Menu
The Registration Parameters menu includes the following options:
Show
Common Name
Organization
Address
Country Code
B.5.1
Show
Select this option to view the registration parameters:
Common Name: the unique common name of the unit. Changes to the
Common Name parameter are applied only after reset. Therefore, the actual
value may differ from configured value. Both the actual and configured values
are displayed.
Organization: the name of the organization (customer) using the unit.
Address: the location of the unit.
Country Code: the ISO 3166 3-digit country code.
B.5.2
Common Name
Select this option to enter the Common Name of the unit. This is the name used
for provisioning of services to the unit, and it must be unique in the entire
network. The administrator should maintain a central database to ensure name
uniqueness throughout the entire network.
The Common Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.
The default Common Name is an empty string (no name). This is a mandatory
parameter - the Common Name must be defined during the installation process.
B.5.3
Organization Name
Select this option to enter the name of the organization (customer) using the unit.
This parameter is optional, and is intended for optional use by the Network
management System.
BreezeMAX System Manual
210
Registration Parameters Menu
The Organization Name consists of up to 64 printable characters.
The default Organization Name is an empty string (no Organization name).
B.5.4
Address
Select this option to enter the location of the unit. This parameter is optional, and
is intended for optional use by the Network management System.
The Address consists of up to 64 printable characters.
The default Address is an empty string (no address).
B.5.5
Country Code
Select this option to enter the ISO 3166 3-digit code of the country where the unit
is located. This parameter is optional, and is intended for optional use by the
Network management System.
The Country Code consists of up to 12 printable characters.
The default Country Code is an empty string (no Country Code).
BreezeMAX System Manual
211
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
B.6
Base Station ID Parameters Menu
Each AU (sector) in the network is configured with a unique Base Station ID that
consists of Operator ID, Cell ID and Sector ID. The Base Station ID parameters in
the SU define the AU(s) that can synchronize with the SU. These parameters
include the 3 components of a base ID for the Base Station (Operator ID, Cell ID,
Sector ID and Base Station ID), and a Base Station ID Mask. The SU can
synchronize only with AUs with a Base Station ID that is included in the IDs
range defined by the applicable parameters in the SU (base ID of the Base Station
that consists of Operator ID, Cell ID and Sector ID, and the Base Station ID
Mask.
The Base Station ID Parameters menu includes the following options:
Show
Operator ID
Cell ID
Sector ID
Base Station ID Mask
B.6.1
Show
Select this option to view the base station ID parameters and the ID of the
connected AU (if applicable). The Base Station ID parameters are applied only
after reset. Therefore, actual values may differ from configured values. For each
parameter both the actual and configured values are displayed:
Operator ID: the base ID of the operator. The unit can synchronize only with
AUs with an Operator ID in the range defined by this Operator ID and the
Operator ID part of the Base Station ID Mask.
Cell ID: the base ID of the cell. The unit can synchronize only with AUs with a
Cell ID in the range defined by this Cell ID and the Cell ID part of the Base
Station ID Mask.
Sector ID: the base ID of the sector. The unit can synchronize only with AUs
with a Sector ID in the range defined by this Sector ID and the Sector ID part
of the Base Station ID Mask.
BreezeMAX System Manual
212
Base Station ID Parameters Menu
Base Station ID Mask: used with the Operator ID, Cell ID and Sector ID to
define the range of AU Base Station ID(s) with which the unit can
synchronize.
Connected Base Station ID: the Base Station ID of the AU with which the unit
is synchronized. If the unit is not synchronized with any AU, an empty string
is displayed.
B.6.2
Operator ID
Select this option to define the Operator ID. This is the base Operator ID used
together with the Operator ID part of the Base Station ID Mask to define the
range of Operator IDs of the AUs that can synchronize with the unit.
The Operator ID comprises 3 groups of up to 3 digits each, where the range of
each group is 0 to 255. Typically the same Operator ID will be used throughout
the entire network. The Operator ID serves also for preventing SUs from
synchronizing with AUs belonging to a different operator.
The default Operator ID is 186.190.0.
B.6.3
Cell ID
Select this option to define the Cell ID. This is the base Cell ID used together with
the Cell ID part of the Base Station ID Mask to define the range of Cell IDs of the
AUs that can synchronize with the unit.
The Cell ID comprises 2 groups of up to 3 digits each, where the range of each
group is 0 to 255.
The default Operator ID is 0.0.
B.6.4
Sector ID
Select this option to define the Sector ID. This is the base Sector ID used together
with the Sector ID part of the Base Station ID Mask to define the range of Sector
IDs of the AUs that can synchronize with the unit.
The Sector ID comprises up to 3 digits in the range 0 to 255.
The default Sector ID is 0.
B.6.5
Base Station ID Mask
Select this option to define the Base Station ID Mask. The Base Station ID Mask,
together with the Operator ID, Cell ID and Sector ID, define the range of Base
Station IDs of AUs that can synchronize with the SU.
The Base Station ID Mask comprises 6 groups of up to 3 digits each, where the
range of each group is 0 to 255. The first 3 groups form the mask for the
BreezeMAX System Manual
213
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
Operator ID. The next 2 groups form the mask for the Cell ID, and the last group
forms the mask for the Sector ID.
The default Base Station ID Mask is 255.255.255.0.0.0.
BreezeMAX System Manual
214
Radio Parameters Menu
B.7
Radio Parameters Menu
The Radio Parameters menu includes the following options:
Show
Bandwidth
Uplink (Tx) frequency
B.7.1
Show
Select this option to view the radio parameters. The Base Station ID parameters
are applied only after reset. Therefore, actual values may differ from configured
values. For each parameter both the actual and configured values are displayed:
Bandwidth: The bandwidth in MHz used by the radio.
Tx Central Frequency: The central transmit frequency in MHz.
Rx Central Frequency: The central receive frequency in MHz. This is not a
configurable parameter – the Rx frequency is calculated as the configurable
Uplink (Tx) Frequency plus 100 MHz.
B.7.2
Bandwidth
Select this option to define the bandwidth of the signal.
The available options are 1.75 MHz and 3.5 MHz.
The default Bandwidth is 3.5 MHz.
B.7.3
Uplink (Tx) Frequency
Select this option to define the transmit frequency of the SU.
The available options are:
For a Bandwidth of 3.5 MHz: 3401.25 to 3498.25 MHz
For a Bandwidth of 1.75 MHz: 3400.375 to 3499.125 MHz
For both options the resolution is 0.125 MHz.
BreezeMAX System Manual
215
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
NOTE
Some frequencies are available only with a Bandwidth of 1.75 MHz (3400.375-3401.125, 3498.3753499.125). Prior to selecting any of these frequencies the Bandwidth must be configured to
1.75 MHz.
BreezeMAX System Manual
216
Performance Monitoring Menu
B.8
Performance Monitoring Menu
The Performance Monitoring menu includes the following options:
Start Link quality Display
Counters
B.8.1
Start Link Quality Display
Select this option to get a continuously updated display of link quality indicators.
Each displayed line includes:
SNR (dB): The average Signal to Noise Ratio of the received signal
RSSI (dB): The average level of the received signal
Optimal Rx Rate: The optimal Rx rate calculated by the SU and requested
from the AU
Last Rx Rate
Last Tx Power (dBm)
B.8.2
Counters
The Counters menu includes the following options:
Display Counters
Reset Counters
B.8.2.1
Display Counters
Select this option to display the current status of the traffic counters. The counts
are the accumulated number of relevant Bytes since the last unit reset or the last
Counters Reset.
The counters indicate the traffic at the Ethernet and Wireless ports, as described
in Figure B-1.
BreezeMAX System Manual
217
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
Figure B-1: Counters Description
For each port, the counters include the frames that were actually transmitted
to/received from the port, the frames transferred to/from the other port
(submitted), and the frames received from/transmitted to the Internal port. The
Internal port refers to the internal management module of the unit that receives
and transmits management and control frames to/from both the Ethernet and
the Wireless ports.
In addition, for each port, the frames that were discarded for various reasons
(errors, overflow etc.) are also counted.
In the Wireless Tx port, the retransmitted frames and the transmitted unicast
frames (not shown in the schematic diagram) are also counted. These counters
serves for calculating the retransmissions rate, providing some indication on link
quality.
The displayed counters include:
Ethernet Port Rx Counters
BreezeMAX System Manual
218
Performance Monitoring Menu
Bytes Received from Ethernet
Bytes Discarded
Bytes Submitted to Wireless
Bytes Submitted to Internal
Ethernet Port Tx Counters
Bytes Submitted from Wireless
Bytes Submitted from Internal
Bytes Transmitted to Ethernet
Bytes Discarded
Wireless Port Rx Counters
Bytes Received from Wireless
Bytes Submitted to Ethernet
Bytes Submitted to Internal
Bytes Discarded
Wireless Port Tx Counters
Bytes Submitted from Ethernet
Bytes Submitted from Internal
Bytes Transmitted to Wireless
Bytes Discarded
Unicast Bytes Transmitted to Wireless
Bytes Retransmitted
Retransmission Rate (%)
BreezeMAX System Manual
219
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
NOTE
Retransmission Rate is defined as:
100*Bytes Retransmitted/ (Unicast Bytes Transmitted to Wireless)
Note that unacknowledged bytes are retransmitted only if ARQ is enabled. Retransmission is
applicable only for information transmitted using either Best Effort (BE) or Non Real Time (NRT)
Quality of Service.
B.8.2.2
Reset Counters
Select this options to reset all the counters.
BreezeMAX System Manual
220
Multirate and ATPC Parameters Menu
B.9
Multirate and ATPC Parameters Menu
In regular operation the transmitted signal is controlled by the ATPC mechanism.
The ATPC mechanism in the SU is controlled by the Base Station.
The Multirate and ATPC Parameters menu enable temporary control of the signal
transmitted by the SU. It is intended for test purposes only, when it may be
necessary to force the unit to transmit at a certain fixed power level. It also
enables a continuous transmission of an OFDM signal at a configurable power
level.
These settings will not be saved and will automatically return to original values
as received from the Base Station when the units resets or upon exiting the
program (or upon termination).
The Multirate and ATPC Parameters menu includes the following options:
Show
Enable ATPC
Disable ATPC and Set Tx Power
Transmit Continuous OFDM
B.9.1
Show
Select this option to view the current Multirate and ATPC parameters:
Last Tx Rate
Optimal Rx Rate: The current optimal rate for received signals.
ATPC: The current status current status (Enabled/Disabled) of the ATPC
mechanism
Tx Power: The current Tx power.
B.9.2
Enable ATPC
Select this option to enable the ATPC mechanism after disabling it temporarily for
testing purposes.
BreezeMAX System Manual
221
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
B.9.3
Disable ATPC and Set Tx Power
Select this option to temporarily disable ATPC for testing purposes. You will be
prompted to enter the requested Tx Power. The available values for the Tx Power
are from –20 dBm to 20 dBm using a 1 dBm resolution.
The default Tx Power is the last power level used before the ATPC algorithm was
disabled.
Upon finishing the test, enable ATPC to resume normal operation. If not enabled
manually, ATPC will be enabled automatically after the next reset or following
termination of the Telnet session.
B.9.4
Transmit Continuous OFDM
Select this option to transmit a continuous OFDM signal. This is possible only
when the unit is not connected (does not receive MAPs). You will be prompted to
enter the requested Tx Power. The available values for the Tx Power are from
-20 dBm to 20 dBm using a 1 dBm resolution.
The default Tx Power is the last power level used before the ATPC algorithm was
disabled.
Continuous OFDM transmission will continue until the next reset.
BreezeMAX System Manual
222
SU Parameters Summary
B.10
SU Parameters Summary
Table B-1: SU’s Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
installer
No
192.168.254.250
Yes
Unit Control Parameters
Password
Up to 20 printable characters,
case sensitive
TFTP Server IP
IP address
Address
(1.7.1.1 if associated
with an AU, 1.1.1.1 if
associated with a
µBST)
SW File Name
Yes
Configuration
File Download
Name
Up to 50 characters
SU_DOWNLOAD_CFG
Yes
Configuration
File Upload
Name
Up to 50 characters
SU_UPLOAD_CFG
Yes
Ethernet Port
Operation
Mode
Auto Negotiation
Auto Negotiation
Yes
10 Mbps, Half-Duplex
10 Mbps, Full-Duplex
100 Mbps, Half-Duplex
100 Mbps, Full-Duplex
Registration Parameters
Common Name
Up to 32 printable characters
Empty
No
Organization
Name
Up to 64 printable characters
Empty
Yes
Address
Up to 64 printable characters
Empty
Yes
Country Code
The ISO 3166 3-digit country
Empty
Yes
code
BreezeMAX System Manual
223
Appendix B - Using the SU Installer Monitor Program
Table B-1: SU’s Parameters Summary
Parameter
Range
Default
Run-Time
Updated
Base Station ID Parameters
Operator ID
3 groups of up to 3 digits each.
Each group range is 0-255.
186.190.0
No
Cell ID
2 groups of up to 2 digits each.
Each group range is 0-255.
0.0
No
Sector ID
A groups of up to 3 digits in the
0
No
255.255.255.0.0.0
No
range 0-255.
Base Station ID
6 groups of up to 3 digits each.
Mask
Each group range is 0-255.
Radio Parameters
Bandwidth
1.75 MHz or 3.5 MHz
3.5 MHz
No
Uplink (Tx)
Frequency
BW=3.5 MHz:3401.25 to 3498.25
3451.75 MHz
No
Last power used by
ATPC
Yes
BW=1.75 MHz:3400.375 to
3499.125
Resolution: steps of 0.125
Multirate and ATPC Parameters
Set Tx Power
-20 to 20 dBm using a 1 dBm
resolution.
BreezeMAX System Manual
224
C
Appendix C - Software Upgrade
In This Appendix:
Before you Start, page 226
File Loading Procedure, page 227
Completing the Software Upgrade (Switching Versions), page 228
Appendix C - Software Upgrade
C.1
Before you Start
NOTE
This section describes software upgrades using the Monitor program. The upgrade procedure can
also be performed using AlvariSTAR. For instructions on using AlvariSTAR for software upgrade,
refer to “The Software Upgrade Manager” section in the AlvariSTAR User Manual.
Loading of new SW files to the unit's FLASH memory can be performed by a
simple loading procedure using a TFTP application. Upgrade packages can be
obtained from the Technical Support section of Alvarion's web site,
http://www.alvarion.com/.
Before performing an upgrade procedure, be sure you have the most recent
instructions, and that the correct SW files are available in your computer.
If you are loading new SU/AU SW files, verify that no more than two SU/AU SW
files exist in the NPU/µBST. If there are three SU/AU SW files in the unit, one of
them must be deleted before loading a new SU/AU SW file.
To view the current SU/AU SW files in NPU/µBST:
Select SU/AU > SW Files in NPU/µBST > Show Files.
To delete an SU/AU SW file from NPU/µBST:
Select SU/AU > SW Files in NPU/µBST > Delete a File and enter the name of the
file to be deleted.
BreezeMAX System Manual
226
File Loading Procedure
C.2
File Loading Procedure
To load software files:
1
Verify that you have IP connectivity from your computer to the NPU/Micro
Base Station (either the MGMT or the DATA port). To verify the connection,
ping the unit's IP address and verify that PING replies are being received.
2
To perform the upgrade, use a DOS TFTP utility with the following syntax: tftp
-i hostaddress put sourcefile
where -i stands for binary mode and hostaddress is the IP address of the unit
to be upgraded (NPU/µBST ). The put command instructs the PC client to
send a file to the hostaddress. sourcefile is the name of the SW file in the PC
Client.
For example, to load the file npu_1_0_2_15 to the NPU whose IP address is
172.17.31.215, use the following command:
tftp -i 172.17.31.215 put npu_1_0_2_15
NOTE
It is recommended to upgrade all system elements with the latest software version. Nevertheless, it
is possible to upgrade each unit separately and independently.
3
Following a successful completion of the file loading process, the Transfer
successful DOS message is displayed.
4
The unit decompresses the loaded file and checks the integrity of the new
version. The new version replaces the previous shadow version only after
verification. If verification tests fail, the loaded version will be rejected. The
unit will reject a file if either the file name or the version number matches the
current Main versions.
5
Check that the loaded versions exist in the unit:
To view the current NPU/µBST SW Versions in the unit:
Select Unit Control>SW Versions Control>Show Versions.
To view the current SU/AU SW files in NPU/µBST:
Select SU/AU>SW Files in NPU/µBST>Show Files.
BreezeMAX System Manual
227
Appendix C - Software Upgrade
C.3
Completing the Software Upgrade
(Switching Versions)
After verifying successful upload of all software files, set the new version as the
main version in each one of the upgraded system elements:
SU(s): Select the SU that should be upgraded. Select Unit Control > SW
Versions Control > Set as Main, and enter the name of the new SU SW file. The
unit will reset automatically and will use the new version after power-up.
Repeat the process for all SUs that should be upgraded.
AU(s): Select the AU that should be upgraded. Select Unit Control > SW
Versions Control > Set as Main, and enter the name of the new AU SW file. The
unit will reset automatically. After power-up, the unit will use the new
version. Repeat the process for all AUs that should be upgraded.
NPU/µBST: Select Unit Control > SW Versions Control > Run from Shadow.
The system will reset automatically. After power-up, the NPU/µBST will run
from the new version, that at this stage is still marked as the Shadow Version.
To switch versions, select Unit Control > SW Versions Control > Set as Main.
BreezeMAX System Manual
228
D
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
In This Appendix:
Traps and Alarms Structure, page 230
Traps and Alarms Sources, page 231
Traps and Alarms Severities, page 232
Trap/Alarm Categories, page 233
BreezeMAX Traps, page 234
Active Alarms, page 261
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.1
Traps and Alarms Structure
A BreezeMAX trap/alarm includes the following variables:
Table D-1: BreezeMAX Trap/Alarm Variables
Trap Variable
Alarm Variable
Description
rbTrapSeqNumber
ID
Trap/Alarm Number: A sequential number
identifying the trap/alarm.
rbTrapSource
src
Trap/Alarm Source: The device that is
associated with the trap/alarm. For more
information refer to Traps and Alarms
Sources on page 231.
rbTrapSeverity
sev
Trap/Alarm Severity: The severity of the
trap/alarm. For more details refer to Traps
and Alarms Severities on page 232.
rbTrapCategory
cat
Trap/Alarm Category: The category of the
trap/alarm. For more details refer to Traps
and Alarms Categories on page 233.
rbTrapAdditionalInfo
<Reason String>
Trap/Alarm Additional Info: Optional
information on the reason for the
trap/alarm, if applicable.
BreezeMAX System Manual
230
Traps and Alarms Sources
D.2
Traps and Alarms Sources
The trap/alarm source indicates the device that originated the trap/alarm. Each
trap/alarm message should include the full hierarchy of its source.
Possible sources and associated information are:
NPU: Slot #.
AU: Slot #.
SU: AU slot #, SU’s MAC address.
PSU: PSU #.
PIU: PIU #.
AVU
Micro Base Station
Service: Service Index, Service Name, Subscriber Index, Subscriber ID.
P
I
U
P
S
U
#1
#1
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
S
L
O
T
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
P
S
U
#3
P
I
U
P
S
U
P
S
U
#2
#2
#4
Figure D-1: Base Station’s Chassis Slots Assignment
BreezeMAX System Manual
231
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.3
Traps and Alarms Severities
The trap/alarm severity level indicates how the capability of the managed object
has been affected. It represents the severity of the alarm, as perceived by the
managed object.
The default severity levels defined in the system, ordered from most severe to
least severe, are:
Table D-2: Trap/Alarm Severities
Severity
Description
Critical
Indicates that a service affecting condition has occurred and an
immediate corrective action is required (e.g. when a managed object
becomes completely out of service and its capability must be restored).
Major
Indicates that a service affecting condition has developed and an urgent
corrective action is required (e.g. when there is severe degradation in
the capability of the managed object and its full capability must be
restored).
Minor
Indicates the existence of a non-service affecting fault condition and that
a corrective action should be taken in order to prevent a more serious
(for example, service affecting) fault.
Warning
Indicates the detection of a potential or impending service-affecting
fault, before any significant effects have been felt. Action should be
taken to further diagnose (if necessary) and correct the problem in order
to prevent it from becoming a more serious service-affecting fault.
Info
Indicates a non service-affecting event, which doesn't require any
further actions.
The severity of the alarm affects also the following:
Unit Fault Status: The summarized severity of the unit’s fault status. It
reflects the severity of the alarm with the highest severity that is ON at a
specific time. For a Base Station, this is the summarized severities of the NPU,
AUs, PIUs, PSUs and AVU.
System Fault Status: The summarized severity of the entire system fault
status.
BreezeMAX System Manual
232
Trap/Alarm Categories
D.4
Trap/Alarm Categories
The type of trap/alarm categorizes it into one of the following five basic categories
(as stated in ITU - CCITT Rec. X.733):
Table D-3: Trap/Alarm Categories
Category
Denoting String
Description
Communications
COMM
Associated with the procedures and/or
processes required to convey information from
one point to another.
Quality of service
QoS
Associated with degradation in the quality of a
service.
Processing Error
PROC
Associated with software or processing fault.
Equipment
EQUP
Associated with an equipment fault.
Environmental
ENVR
Associated with a condition relating to an
enclosure in which the equipment resides.
BreezeMAX System Manual
233
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5
BreezeMAX Traps
BreezeMAX traps include the following trap groups:
General Traps on page 234.
Chassis/µBST Related Traps on page 239.
NPU/µBST Related Traps on page 242.
AU/µBST Related Traps on page 245.
SU Related Traps on page 247.
Software Download and BER Test Related Traps on page 248.
Service Related Traps on page 254.
MIB II Traps on page 257.
D.5.1
General Traps
D.5.1.1
rbResetOn Trap
rbResetOn Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
1
Description
The device/card is about to perform reset.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
Additional Info
1, 2 (see details in the following table)
BreezeMAX System Manual
234
BreezeMAX Traps
rbResetOn Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
1
External Reset
2
Internal Fault Reset
D.5.1.2
rbDiagnisticsHwFaultOn Trap
rbDiagnisticsHwFaultOn Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
2
Description
The device/card has detected a hardware fault.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Major
Trap Category
Equipment
Additional Info
3...8, 23...27 (see details in the following table)
rbDiagnisticsHwFaultOn Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
3
SU HW fault. Manta’s (ASIC) PLL is not locked for more than 5
msec.
4
SU HW fault. Manta’s (ASIC) PLL is not locked in steady state.
5
SU HW fault. Host failed to download Manta's firmware (complete
with CRC errors, or handshake error).
6
SU HW fault. Radio’s PLL is not locked after power up sequence.
7
SU HW fault. Radio’s PLL is not locked in steady state.
8
SU, AU, NPU or µBST HW fault. A Built In Test (BIT) has failed.
23
µBST/AU HW fault. Output Tx Power exceeds PMAX+5dB for more
than 5 minutes.
BreezeMAX System Manual
235
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
rbDiagnisticsHwFaultOn Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
24
µBST/AU HW fault. When a process to burn IDU table fails (CRC
check on finish fails, FTP session failed, no place in FFS).
25
µBST/AU HW fault. IF synthesizer failed to lock on the frequency
set on the synthesizer.
26
µBST/AU HW fault. µBST/AU detected an error while downloading
the ODU table. The string includes also the byte number of the ODU
table where the error was detected.
27
µBST/AU HW fault. Connection between µBST/AU and ODU has
been lost.
D.5.1.3
rbDiagnisticsHwFaultOff Trap
rbDiagnisticsHwFaultOff Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
3
Description
A previously detected hardware fault has been fixed.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Equipment
Trap Category
Info
Additional Info
3...8, 23...27. For details see Additional Info in
rbDiagnisticsHwFaultOn Trap Additional Info table above.
BreezeMAX System Manual
236
BreezeMAX Traps
D.5.1.4
rbMonitorAccessOn Trap
rbMonitorAccessOn Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
4
Description
The device is accessed via LCI (Monitor port) or Telnet.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
Additional Info
140, 141. For details see the following table.
rbMonitorAccessOn Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
140
LCI (Monitor port) access has been detected.
141
Telnet access has been detected.
D.5.1.5
rbMonitorAccessOff Trap
rbMonitorAccessOff Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
5
Description
LCI (Monitor port) or Telnet access to the device has been
terminated.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
Additional Info
140, 141. For details see rbMonitorAccessOn Trap Additional Info
table above.
BreezeMAX System Manual
237
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5.1.6
rbAuNetworkEntryStatus Trap
rbAuNetworkEntryStatus Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
6
Description
µBST/AU Network Entry status has been changed
Trap Source
µBST/AU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Communication
Additional Info
135...139
rbAuNetworkEntryStatus Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
135
µBST/AU DHCP process failed
136
µBST/AU configuration download failed
137
µBST/AU set parameters failed
138
µBST/AU firmware download failed
139
µBST/AU is in service
BreezeMAX System Manual
238
BreezeMAX Traps
D.5.2
Chassis/µBST Related Traps
NOTE
In µBST, Slot# will always be 1, and PSU# will always be 1.
D.5.2.1
rbShelfCardExtractionOn Trap
rbShelfCardExtractionOn Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
21
Description
The card is being extracted from the chassis.
Trap Source
NPU/AU/PIU/PSU/AVU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
D.5.2.2
rbShelfCardInsertionOn Trap
rbShelfCardInsertionOn Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
22
Description
The card is being inserted into the chassis.
Trap Source
NPU/AU/PIU/AU/AVU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
BreezeMAX System Manual
239
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5.2.3
rbShelfPeripheralEquipmentFaultOn Trap
rbShelfPeripheralEquipmentFaultOn Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
23
Description
A fault has been detected in a peripheral unit or a µBST component.
Trap Source
µBST/PIU/PSU/AVU
Trap Severity
Minor
Trap Category
Equipment
Additional Info
53...55
rbShelfPeripheralEquipmentFaultOn Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
53
A fault has been detected in a PSU, or µBST has detected a power
supply failure.
54
A fault has been detected in a PIU (not applicable to µBST).
55
A fault has been detected in the AVU, or the µBST has detected a
problem in at least one of its fans.
D.5.2.4
rbShelfPeripheralEquipmentFaultOff Trap
rbShelfPeripheralEquipmentFaultOff Trap
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
24
Description
A fault in a peripheral unit has been corrected.
Trap Source
µBST/PIU/PSU/AVU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
Additional Info
53...55. See details in the following table.
BreezeMAX System Manual
240
BreezeMAX Traps
rbShelfPeripheralEquipmentFaultOff Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
53
NPU/µBST has detected that the faulty PSU/power supply has
become fully operational.
54
NPU has detected that the faulty PIU has become fully operational.
55
NPU/µBST has detected that the faulty AVU/fan has become fully
operational
D.5.2.5
rbShelfEnvParamFaultOn Trap
rbShelfEnvParamFaultOn Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
25
Description
A fault has been detected in a chassis environmental parameter.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
Additional Info
73...76. For details see the following table.
rbShelfEnvParamFaultOn Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
73
A fault has been detected in the dry contacts of NPU/µBST.
74
An NPU/µBST temperature fault has been detected.
75
An AU-IDU temperature fault has been detected.
76
An AU-ODU temperature fault has been detected.
BreezeMAX System Manual
241
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5.2.6
rbShelfEnvParamFaultOff Trap
rbShelfEnvParamFaultOff Trap
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
26
Description
A previously detected fault in a chassis environmental parameter
has been fixed.
Trap Source
NPU
Trap Severity
Equipment
Trap Category
73...76. For details see rbShelfEnvParamFaultOn Trap Additional
Info table above.
D.5.3
NPU/µBST Related Traps
D.5.3.1
rbConfigurationChanged Trap
rbConfigurationChanged Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
41
Description
A configuration change has been detected.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
Additional Info
33: A Management Port parameter has been changed.
BreezeMAX System Manual
242
BreezeMAX Traps
D.5.4
rbParameterSetFailure Trap
rbParameterSetFailure Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
42
Description
An error in configuration change has been detected.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
Additional Info
Provided in rbTrapSetFailureReason. See below.
rbTrapSetFailureReason
No.
Description
1
General Error
2
Failed to update parameters CRC
3
Set defaults to unknown type (internal error)
4
Failed to set defaults (internal error)
5
Log preffix is too long
6
Failed to set Log Preffix (internal error)
7
Cell Radius is invalid
8
Failed to set Cell Radius
9
Failed to set Base Station ID (internal error)
10
Failed to set Base Station Mask (internal error)
11
Failed to set ARQ mode (internal error)
12
Failed to set Band (internal error)
13
Tx Frequency is out of calculated limited range
14
Tx frequency is invalid
BreezeMAX System Manual
243
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
rbTrapSetFailureReason
No.
Description
15
Tx frequency is out of maximum permitted range
16
Tx Frequency set failed (internal error)
17
Tx Power value is invalid
18
Set Tx Power Failed (internal error)
19
UL Basic rate is invalid
20
Failed to set Uplink Basic Rate (internal error)
21
DL Basic rate is invalid
22
Failed to set Downlink Basic Rate (internal error)
23
It is forbidden to set SU rate while Multirate is enabled
24
Invalid Downlink rate
25
Invalid Uplink rate
26
Invalid Optimal RSSI
27
Set Optimal RSSI failed (internal error)
28
BER Test data size is less than minimum allowed
29
BER Test data size is higher than the maximum allowed
30
BER Test is already running
31
Invalid BER Test Rate
32
Invalid BER Test Priority
33
Failed to set Test Priority for BER Test (internal error)
34
Invalid BER Test packet size
35
Failed to set BER Test packet size (internal error)
36
Failed to create connection for the BER test
37
Failed to disconnect Telnet session
38
Invalid Ethernet Port configuration mode
39
Set Ethernet Port mode failed (internal error)
BreezeMAX System Manual
244
BreezeMAX Traps
rbTrapSetFailureReason
No.
Description
40
SU Installer password is too long
41
Set SU Installer password failed (internal error)
42
Invalid Band
43
Invalid Aging Time or internal error
44
Invalid Limit of Supported devices or internal error
45
Failed to set Limit mode - invalid value or internal error
D.5.5
AU/µBST Related Traps
D.5.5.1
rbOduCrcErrorOn Trap
rbOduCrcErrorOn Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
61
Description
A CRC error has been detected in the AU-ODU table.
Trap Source
µBST/AU
Trap Severity
Warning
Trap Category
Communication
BreezeMAX System Manual
245
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5.5.2
rbOduCrcErrorOff Trap
rbOduCrcErrorOff Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
62
Description
A previously detected CRC error in the AU-ODU table has been
fixed.
Trap Source
µBST/AU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Communication
D.5.5.3
rbOduCommErrorOn Trap
rbOduCommErrorOn Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
63
Description
An error has been detected in the communication with the AU-ODU.
Trap Source
µBST/AU
Trap Severity
Minor
Trap Category
Communication
D.5.5.4
rbOduCommErrorOff Trap
rbOduCommErrorOff Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
64
Description
A previously detected error in the communication with the AU-ODU
has been fixed.
Trap Source
µBST/AU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Communication
BreezeMAX System Manual
246
BreezeMAX Traps
D.5.6
SU Related Traps
D.5.6.1
rbSuMaxTxPowerReached Trap
rbSuMaxTxPowerReached Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
81
Description
The SU has reached the maximum allowed output power.
Trap Source
SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
PROC
D.5.6.2
rbSuMinTxPowerReached Trap
rbSuMinTxPowerReached Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
82
Description
The SU has reached the minimum allowed output power.
Trap Source
SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
PROC
BreezeMAX System Manual
247
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5.6.3
rbSuNetworkEntryStatus Trap
rbSuNetworkEntryStatus Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
83
Description
SU’s network entry status has been changed.
Trap Source
SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
PROC
Additional Info
132...134. For details see the following table.
rbSuNetworkEntryStatus Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
132
Authentication process failed
133
Registration process failed
134
Registration process completed successfully
D.5.7
Software Download and BER Test Related
Traps
D.5.7.1
rbSwDownloadStart Trap
rbSwDownloadStart Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
101
Description
SW download process has started.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
PROC
BreezeMAX System Manual
248
BreezeMAX Traps
D.5.7.2
rbSwDownloadEnd Trap
rbSwDownloadEnd Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
102
Description
SW download process has finished.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
PROC
D.5.7.3
rbSwDownloadError Trap
rbSwDownloadError Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
103
Description
An error has been detected in the SW download process.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Minor
Trap Category
PROC
Additional Info
100...103, 150..181. See details in the following table.
NOTE
Additional Info 150…181 details reasons for AU/SU SW download failures.
BreezeMAX System Manual
249
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
rbSwDownloadError Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
100
Unsupported Software version has been detected. This trap is
generated by a µBST/NPU when there is no compatibility between
versions (µBST/NPU, AU or SU). It is generated by AU and SU
when there is no compatibility with corresponding SU or AU
versions.
101
The requested SW version is not available at µBST/NPU site. This
trap is generated only by µBST/NPU.
102
SW download process failed.
103
No space available in disk. There are already 3 SW versions in
µBST/NPU for AU/SU, and another version is being downloaded.
150
Download is aborted by an external event.
151
Header's "HW Version" is not compatible with the real unit's HW
152
Header's "HW Config" is not compatible with the real unit's HW
153
Failure to create a new file on Flash
154
Failure to open file on Flash
155
Failure to get file statistics (size..)
156
Failure to read from file
157
Failure to write to file
158
Failure to write information about SW file to the "Info" file
159
Can not Access Flash using File System
160
Old Shadow file is not accessible and can not be removed
161
NPU/µBST File Signature is not recognized
162
File does not contain header
163
File's header is too long
164
Some header's field title or format is not recognized
165
Header's "Unit Type" field does not match current Unit (Trying to
Download wrong SW)
166
RF Version should be checked but is not found in header
BreezeMAX System Manual
250
BreezeMAX Traps
rbSwDownloadError Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
167
Header's "RF Revision" is not compatible with the real unit's RF
168
CRC calculation failed
169
Calculated CRC does not match CRC in the header
170
Calculated file size does not match file size in the header
171
Failure to start TFTP client
172
Error is received during TFTP
173
Failure to read received data from TFTP data socket
174
TFTP data socket is empty
175
Another TFTP session is already in process
176
File name is not set properly
177
File size exceeds the maximum size that can be downloaded to
AU/SU
178
Files with extension other than ".bz" can not be downloaded to
AU/SU.
179
File exists as Main and can not be removed
180
File is not available
181
Communication timeout
BreezeMAX System Manual
251
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5.7.4
rbSwSwitchFailed Trap
rbSwSwitchFailed Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
104
Description
Software switch-over failed
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Minor
Trap Category
PROC
Additional Info
104, 105. See details in the following table
rbSwSwitchFailed Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
104
Run from shadow action
105
Set as Main action
D.5.7.5
rbSwSwitchSucceed Trap
rbSwSwitchSucceed Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
105
Description
Software switch-over succeeded
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
PROC
Additional Info
105 (Set as Main action)
BreezeMAX System Manual
252
BreezeMAX Traps
D.5.7.6
rbBERTestFinished Trap
rbBERTestFinished Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
106
Description
BER Test finished
Trap Source
SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
PROC
D.5.7.7
rbBERTestStarted Trap
rbBERTestStarted Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
107
Description
BER Test has started
Trap Source
SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
PROC
BreezeMAX System Manual
253
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5.8
Service Related Traps
D.5.8.1
rbServiceDown Trap
rbServiceDown Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
111
Description
The Service is down
Trap Source
SU, ServiceID
Trap Severity
Major
Trap Category
QoS
D.5.8.2
rbServiceUp Trap
rbServiceUp Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
112
Description
The service has become operational
Trap Source
SU, ServiceID
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
QoS
BreezeMAX System Manual
254
BreezeMAX Traps
D.5.8.3
rbServiceChanged Trap
rbServiceChanged Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
113
Description
The Service properties have been modified
Trap Source
SU, ServiceID
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
QoS
Additional Info
119...122. See details in the following table.
rbServiceChanged Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
119
Service Admin Status has been changed
120
Service SU MAC Address has been changed
121
Service VLAN List has been changed
122
Service Profile has been changed (implies that another Service
Profile has been set)
BreezeMAX System Manual
255
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5.8.4
rbServiceGeneralError Trap
rbServiceGeneralError Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
114
Description
A Service error has been detected
Trap Source
SU, ServiceID
Trap Severity
Minor
Trap Category
QoS
Additional Info
111...118. See details in the following table.
rbServiceGeneralError Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
111
The maximum allowed number of Subscribers has been reached
112
The maximum allowed number of Service configurations has been
reached
113
The maximum allowed number of Service Profile configurations has
been reached
114
The maximum allowed number of Forwarding Rules configurations
has been reached
115
The maximum allowed number of Policy Rules configurations has
been reached
116
The maximum allowed number of QoS Profiles configurations has
been reached
117
The maximum allowed number of calls has been reached
118
There is no available bandwidth to allocate to a new VoIP call
BreezeMAX System Manual
256
BreezeMAX Traps
D.5.9
MIB II Traps
D.5.9.1
coldStart Trap
coldStart Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
128
Description
The device is rebooting itself and may change its configuration or
the SNMP agent's configuration
Trap Source
µBST/NPU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
D.5.9.2
warmStart Trap
warmStart Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
129
Description
The device is rebooting itself but neither the device's nor the SNMP
agent's configuration will change
Trap Source
µBST/NPU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Equipment
BreezeMAX System Manual
257
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5.9.3
linkDown Trap
linkDown Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
130
Description
A communication link failure
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Communication
Additional Info
127...131. See details in the following table.
linkDown Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
127
The Ethernet connection to the backbone has been found to be
down. A µBST/NPU trap.
128
The Management connection has been found to be down. A
µBST/NPU trap.
129
The communication to an AU has failed. An AU trap.
130
Radio link has failed completely (loss of communication to all SUs).
A µBST/AU trap.
131
Radio link to a specific SU has failed. An SU trap.
BreezeMAX System Manual
258
BreezeMAX Traps
D.5.9.4
linkUp Trap
linkUp Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
131
Description
A communication link that previously failed has become operational.
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/AU/SU
Trap Severity
Info
Trap Category
Communication
Additional Info
127...131. See details in the following table.
linkUp Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
127
The Ethernet connection to the backbone has been found to be
active. A µBST/NPU trap.
128
The Management connection has been found to be active. A
µBST/NPU trap.
129
The communication to an AU has become active. An AU trap.
130
Radio link has become active (at least one SU is synchronized). A
µBST/AU trap.
131
A new SU has become synchronized (not necessarily registered).
An SU trap.
BreezeMAX System Manual
259
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.5.9.5
authenticationFailure Trap
authenticationFailure Trap Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
132
Description
An authentication process has failed
Trap Source
µBST/NPU/SU
Trap Severity
Warning
Trap Category
Communication
Additional Info
142...143. See details in the following table.
authenticationFailure Trap Additional Info
No.
Description
142
LCI (Monitor port) authentication failure. A µBST/NPU trap.
143
Telnet authentication failure. A µBST/NPU or SU trap.
BreezeMAX System Manual
260
Active Alarms
D.6
Active Alarms
Active alarms can be viewed in the Alarms Log of NPU/µBST, which includes all
the alarms that are currently on.
The alarms are displayed in the format:
ID=<id>,name=<Name>,cat=<Category>,sev=<Severity>,src=<Source>, <Reason
String>
Example: ID=21, name=ShelfCardExtractionOn, cat=EQUP, sev=Info, src=PIU#1,
PIU CARD EXTR
D.6.1
LinkDown Alarm
LinkDown Alarm Variables
Variable
Description
ID
130
Description
A communication link failure
Source
µBST/NPU/AU
Severity
Info
Category
Communication
Reason String
NPU/µBST ETH CONN: The Ethernet connection to the backbone
has been found to be down. A µBST/NPU alarm.
NPU/µBST MNG CONN: The Management connection has been
found to be down. A µBST/NPU alarm.
NPU AU CONN: The communication to an AU has failed. An AU
alarm.
AU RLNK LOSS: Radio link has failed completely (loss of
communication to all SUs). A µBST/AU alarm.
BreezeMAX System Manual
261
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.6.2
AuthenticationFailure Alarm
AuthenticationFailure Alarm Variables
Variable
Description
Sequential Number
132
Description
An access authentication process has failed
Source
µBST/NPU
Severity
Warning
Category
Communication
Reason String
NPU LCI UNAUTH ACC: LCI (Monitor port) authentication failure.
NPU TELNET UNAUTH ACC: Telnet authentication failure.
NOTE
Authentication Alarms remain on until expiration of the timeout.
D.6.3
DiagnosticsHwFaultOn Alarm
DiagnisticsHwFaultOn Alarm Variables
Variable
Description
ID
2
Description
The device/card has detected a hardware fault
Source
µBST/NPU
Severity
Major
Category
Equipment
Reason String
BIT Failed
BreezeMAX System Manual
262
Active Alarms
D.6.4
MonitorAccessOn Alarm
MonitorAccessOn Alarm Variables
Variable
Description
ID
4
Description
The device is accessed via LCI (Monitor port) or Telnet
Source
µBST/NPU
Severity
Info
Category
Equipment
Reason String
NPU/µBST LCI ACCESS: LCI (Monitor port) access has been
detected.
NPU/µBST TELNET ACCESS: Telnet access has been detected.
D.6.5
SwDownloadStart Alarm
SwDownloadStart Alarm Variables
Variable
Description
ID
101
Description
SW download process has started
Source
µBST/NPU/AU
Severity
Info
Category
PROC
Reason String
SW DNL START
BreezeMAX System Manual
263
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.6.6
SwDownloadError Alarm
SwDownloadError Alarm Variables
Variable
Description
ID
103
Description
An error has been detected in the SW download process
Source
µBST/NPU/AU
Severity
Minor
Category
PROC
Reason String
SW DNL FAIL
D.6.7
rbSwSwitchFailed Alarm
SwSwitchFailed Alarm Variables
Variable
Description
ID
104
Description
Software switch-over failed
Source
µBST/NPU/AU
Severity
Minor
Category
PROC
Reason String
SW SWITCH
BreezeMAX System Manual
264
Active Alarms
D.6.8
ShelfCardExtractionOn Alarm
ShelfCardExtractionOn Alarm Variables
Variable
Description
ID
21 (AU),
Description
The card is being extracted from the chassis
Source
NPU/AU
Severity
Info
Category
Equipment
Reason String
AU CARD EXTR
NPU CARD EXTR
PIU CARD EXTR
PSU CARD EXTR
AVU CARD EXTR
D.6.9
ShelfPeripheralEquipmentFaultOn Alarm
ShelfPeripheralEquipmentFaultOn Alarm Variables
Variable
Description
ID
23
Description
A fault has been detected in a peripheral unit or a µBST
components
Source
µBST/PIU/PSU/AVU
Severity
Minor
Category
Equipment
Reason String
BST PER FAULT
BreezeMAX System Manual
265
Appendix D - Traps and Alarms
D.6.10 ShelfEnvParamFaultOn Alarm
ShelfEnvParamFaultOn Alarm Variables
Variable
Description
ID
25
Description
A fault has been detected in a chassis environmental parameter
Source
µBST/NPU
Severity
Info
Category
Equipment
Reason String
BST ENV FAULT
BreezeMAX System Manual
266
E
Appendix E - Defining Service Profiles for
Generic VoIP Gateways
In this Appendix:
Introduction, page 268
1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 Service Profile, page 270
1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729 Service Profile, page 272
1 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 Service Profile, page 274
1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711 Service Profile, page 276
Appendix E - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways
E.1
Introduction
This section describes the method used for defining the pre-configured Service
Profiles for Generic (3rd party) VoIP devices that do not use the DRAP protocol.
The same principles can be used for modifying the pre-configured profiles or
creating new ones for VoIP services that have different characteristics.
E.1.1
Priority Marking
We distinguish between two types of Service Profiles for Generic VoIP devices:
Marking is not used: This scenario is applicable when the VoIP device behind
the SU does not support either DSCP or 802.1p marking to distinguish
between different VoIP related traffic types, or when such marking is not used
for any reason. The implication is that a single Continuous Grant connection
should be used for all VoIP traffic.
Marking is used: This scenario is applicable when the VoIP device is capable
of marking the different VoIP related traffic types. The assumption is that 3
different priority marks are used: One for RTP traffic, the second for RTCP and
VoIP Signaling, and a third one for Data (Device Management).
E.1.2
General Assumptions
Protocol Header: 18 bytes for Ethernet L2 header (including 4 bytes for
VLAN), plus 40 bytes of IP/UDP/RTP headers. A total of 58 bytes.
RTCP bandwidth: RFC 3556, Session Description Protocol (SDP) Bandwidth
Modifiers for RTP Control Protocol (RTCP) Bandwidth, states that normally,
the amount of bandwidth allocated to RTCP in an RTP session is 5% of the
session bandwidth. To be on the safe side allocate 10% of the RTP bandwidth
to RTCP.
VoIP Signaling: Cisco states that its IP Phones generate approximately
150 bps signaling traffic (without L2 overhead). To be on the safe side assume
2 Kbps of VoIP Signaling traffic for each POTS interface.
Fax: Fax services are assumed to be based on T.38 Fax Relay. Protocol Header
is assumed to be 58 bytes (same as for RTP).
Data: Data traffic may include ARP, DHCP, TFTP, SNMP, HTTP and other
management protocols. The recommended default bandwidth value is up to
64 Kbps if a Best Effort connection is used for this traffic. If a Continuous
Grant service is used for all VoIP related traffic, a lower bandwidth will be
BreezeMAX System Manual
268
Introduction
allocated to Data traffic. Note that the use of bandwidth consuming protocols
when an active call is present should be avoided.
BreezeMAX System Manual
269
Appendix E - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways
E.2
1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 Service Profile
E.2.1
Service Characteristics
G.729 codec, 20msec sample interval
1 POTS
No Fax
Priority marking behind the SU is not used: All VoIP related traffic is classified
onto a single Continuous Grant (CG) connection.
Multiple media streams to support Call-Waiting: If the traffic exceeds the BW
allocated to the CG connection, the SU may request to double the allocated
BW.
E.2.2
RTP BW Calculation
The required bandwidth for a G.729 call (8 Kbps codec bit rate) with RTP and 20
bytes of voice payload is:
Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40
bytes) + (voice payload of 20 bytes) = 78 bytes
Total packet size (bits) = (78 bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 624 bits
PPS (Packets Per Second) = (8 Kbps codec bit rate) / (160 bits) = 50 pps
Note: 160 bits = 20 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byte
Bandwidth per call = Total packet size (624 bits) * 50 pps = 31.2 Kbps
E.2.3
RTCP BW Calculation
RTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10 % of 31.2 Kbps approximately 3.1 Kbps.
E.2.4
QoS Profile
The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 31.2 Kbps. To accommodate
for other traffic types, such as RTCP (up to 3.1 Kbps), Voice Signaling (up to 2
Kbps) and Data (Device Management), we allocate to it a total bandwidth of
31.2 x 1.5=46.8 Kbps (equivalent to a Packet Size of 936 bits, or 117 bytes). The
SU may request twice this BW so it will be allocated with up to approximately 94
Kbps. This is assumed to be sufficient for all traffic scenarios, including Call
Waiting.
Thus, the CG 47 QoS Profile parameters are:
BreezeMAX System Manual
270
1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 Service Profile
Packet Size: 117 bytes
Sample Interval: 20 msec
BreezeMAX System Manual
271
Appendix E - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways
E.3
1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729 Service
Profile
E.3.1
Service Characteristics
G.729 codec, 20msec sample interval
1 POTS
T.38 Fax
DSCP priority marking behind the SU is used, with the following values:
63: RTP traffic
26: RTCP and VoIP traffic
0: Data traffic
Single media stream to support Call-Waiting
E.3.2
Voice RTP BW Calculation
The required bandwidth for a G.729 call (8 Kbps codec bit rate) with RTP and 20
bytes of voice payload is:
Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40
bytes) + (voice payload of 20 bytes) = 78 bytes
Total packet size (bits) = (78 bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 624 bits
PPS (Packets Per Second) = (8 Kbps codec bit rate) / (160 bits) = 50 pps
Note: 160 bits = 20 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byte
Bandwidth per call = Total packet size (624 bits) * 50 pps = 31.2 Kbps
E.3.3
Voice RTCP BW Calculation
RTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10 % of 31.2 Kbps is 3.12 Kbps.
E.3.4
T.38 14,400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation
The required bandwidth with a 20 msec sample interval is as follows:
Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40
bytes) + (voice payload of 36 bytes) = 94 bytes
Total packet size (bits) = (94bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 752 bits
BreezeMAX System Manual
272
1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729 Service Profile
PPS = (14.4 Kbps bit rate) / (288 bits) = 50 pps
Note: 288 bits = 36 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byte
Bandwidth per call = total packet size (752bits) * 50 pps = 37.6 Kbps
Since Fax BW is higher than Voice BW, the Fax BW requirement mandates the
CG connection’s attributes. This is true for all G.729 and G.723 codecs.
E.3.5
FAX RTCP BW Calculation
RTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10 % of 37.6 Kbps is 3.76 Kbps.
E.3.6
QoS Profiles
E.3.6.1
CG QoS for RTP traffic
The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 37.6 Kbps (equivalent to a
Packet Size of 752 bits, or 94 bytes). Thus, the CG 38 QoS Profile parameters are:
Packet Size: 117 bytes
Sample Interval: 20 msec
E.3.6.2
RT QoS for RTCP and VoIP Signaling
The required bandwidth is 5.76 Kbps (3.76 Kbps for Fax RTCP plus 2 Kbps for
VoIP Signaling). We round it up to 6 Kbps. Thus, the required RT 6 QoS Profile
parameters are:
CIR: 6 Kbps
CT: Short
E.3.6.3
BE QoS for Data
As stated, the recommended QoS Profile for Data is BE 64, with the following
parameters:
MIR: 64 Kbps
CT: Medium
BreezeMAX System Manual
273
Appendix E - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways
E.4
1 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 Service Profile
E.4.1
Service Characteristics
G.711 codec, 20msec sample interval
1 POTS
No Fax
Priority marking behind the SU is not used: All VoIP related traffic is classified
onto a single Continuous Grant (CG) connection.
Multiple media streams to support Call-Waiting: If the traffic exceeds the BW
allocated to the CG connection, the SU may request to double the allocated
BW.
E.4.2
RTP BW Calculation
The required bandwidth for a G.711 call (64 Kbps codec bit rate) with RTP and
160 bytes of voice payload is:
Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40
bytes) + (voice payload of 160 bytes) = 218 bytes
Total packet size (bits) = (218 bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 1744 bits
PPS = (64 Kbps codec bit rate) / (1280 bits) = 50 pps
Note: 1280 bits = 160 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byte
Bandwidth per call = total packet size (1744 bits) * 50 pps = 87.2Kbps
E.4.3
RTCP BW Calculation
RTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10 % of 87.2 Kbps approximately 8.7 Kbps.
E.4.4
QoS Profile
The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is approximately 88 Kbps. To
accommodate for other traffic types, such as RTCP (up to 8.7 Kbps), Voice
Signaling (up to 2 Kbps) and Data (Device Management), we allocate to it a total
bandwidth of 108 Kbps (equivalent to a Packet Size of 2160 bits, or 270 bytes).
The SU may request twice this BW so it will be allocated with up to approximately
216 Kbps. This is assumed to be sufficient for all traffic scenarios, including Call
Waiting.
Thus, the CG 108 QoS Profile parameters are:
BreezeMAX System Manual
274
1 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 Service Profile
Packet Size: 270 bytes
Sample Interval: 20 msec
BreezeMAX System Manual
275
Appendix E - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways
E.5
1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711 Service
Profile
E.5.1
Service Characteristics
G.729 codec, 20msec sample interval
1 POTS
T.38 Fax
DSCP priority marking behind the SU is used, with the following values:
63: RTP traffic
26: RTCP and VoIP traffic
0: Data traffic
Single media stream to support Call-Waiting
E.5.2
Voice RTP BW Calculation
The required bandwidth for a G.711 call (64 Kbps codec bit rate) with RTP and
160 bytes of voice payload is:
Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40
bytes) + (voice payload of 160 bytes) = 218 bytes
Total packet size (bits) = (218 bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 1744 bits
PPS = (64 Kbps codec bit rate) / (1280 bits) = 50 pps
Note: 1280 bits = 160 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byte
Bandwidth per call = total packet size (1744 bits) * 50 pps = 87.2 Kbps
E.5.3
Voice RTCP BW Calculation
RTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10 % of 87.2 Kbps is 8.72 Kbps.
E.5.4
T.38 14,400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation
The required bandwidth with a 20 msec sample interval is as follows:
Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40
bytes) + (voice payload of 36 bytes) = 94 bytes
Total packet size (bits) = (94 bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 752 bits
BreezeMAX System Manual
276
1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711 Service Profile
PPS = (14.4 Kbps bit rate) / (288 bits) = 50 pps
Note: 288 bits = 36 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byte
Bandwidth per call = total packet size (752 bits) * 50 pps = 37.6 Kbps
As Fax BW is lower than Voice BW, the Voice BW requirement mandates the CG
connection’s attributes. This is true for all G.711 codecs.
E.5.5
FAX RTCP BW Calculation
RTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10 % of 37.6 Kbps is 3.76 Kbps.
E.5.6
QoS Profiles
E.5.6.1
CG QoS for RTP traffic
The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 87.2 Kbps (equivalent to a
Packet Size of 1744 bits, or 218 bytes). Thus, the CG 88 QoS Profile parameters
are:
Packet Size: 218 bytes
Sample Interval: 20 msec
E.5.6.2
RT QoS for RTCP and VoIP Signaling
The required bandwidth is 10.72 Kbps (8.72 Kbps for Voice RTCP plus 2 Kbps for
VoIP Signaling). We round it up to 611 Kbps. Thus, the required RT 11 QoS
Profile parameters are:
CIR: 11 Kbps
CT: Short
E.5.6.3
BE QoS for Data
As stated, the recommended QoS Profile for Data is BE 64, with the following
parameters:
MIR: 64 Kbps
CT: Medium
BreezeMAX System Manual
277
Glossary
AAA
Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (Pronounced
"triple a."). A system (or several systems) that controls what
resources users have access to, and keeps track of the activity of
users over the network.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute. A voluntary organization
composed of corporate, government, and other members that
coordinates standards-related activities, approves U.S. national
standards, and develops positions for the United States in
international standards organizations.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol. Internet protocol used to map an IP
address to a MAC address. Defined in RFC 826.
ARQ
Automatic Repeat reQuest. A communication technique in which
the receiving device detects errors and requests retransmissions.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A code for
representing English characters as numbers, with each letter
assigned a number from 0 to 127.
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A network technology that
dynamically allocates bandwidth. ATM uses fixed-size data
packets and a fixed channel between two points for data transfer.
ATM was designed to support multiple services such as voice,
graphics, data, and full-motion video. It allows service providers
to dynamically assign bandwidth to individual customers.
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control
AU
Access Unit
AVU
Air Ventilation Unit
Glossary
BE
Best effort. A service where neither throughput nor delay
guarantees are provided. The subscriber unit sends requests for
bandwidth in either random access slots or dedicated
transmission opportunities. The occurrence of dedicated
opportunities is subject to network load, and the subscriber unit
cannot rely on their presence. Service parameters include
Committed Time (CT) and Maximum Information Rate (MIR).
BER
Bit Error Rate. In a digital transmission, BER is the percentage of
bits with errors divided by the total number of bits that have
been transmitted, received or processed over a given time period.
BPSK
Binary Phase-Shift Keying. A data transfer technique. BPSK
transmits data using two phase modulation signals, one phase
representing a binary one, and the other representing a binary
zero. The signal is divided into bits; their status is determined by
the preceding wave. If the wave changes, for example, the signal
is reversed.
BST
Base Station
BW
Bandwidth
BWA
Broadband Wireless Access
CBR
Constant Bit-Rate
CG
Continuous Grant. Also known as Unsolicited Grant Services
(UGS), is tailored for carrying constant bit- rate (CBR) real-time
services characterized by fixed size data packets on a periodic
basis such as VoIP or E1/T1. Service parameters include
unsolicited grant size (packet size) and normal grant interval
(sample interval).
CIR
Committed Information Rate. The rate (in bits per second) at
which a network guarantees to transfer information under
normal conditions, averaged over a minimum increment of time.
cPCI
Compact Peripheral Component Interface. a new standard for
computer backplane architecture and peripheral integration,
defined and developed by the peripheral component interconnect
(PCI) industrial computers manufacturers group (PICMG).
Designed to provide rugged, high-density systems.
CPE
Customer Premise Equipment. Communications equipment that
resides on the customer's premises.
BreezeMAX System Manual
II
Glossary
CRC
Cyclical Redundancy Check. A common technique for detecting
data transmission errors, in which the frame recipient calculates
a remainder by dividing frame contents by a prime binary divisor
and compares the calculated remainder to a value stored in the
frame by the sending equipment.
CSMA/CD
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection. Mediaaccess mechanisms wherein devices ready to transmit data first
check the channel for a carrier. If no carrier is sensed for a
specific period of time, a device can transmit. If two devices
transmit at once, a collision occurs and is detected by all
colliding devices. This collision subsequently delays
retransmissions from those devices for some random length of
time. Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 use CSMA/CD access.
CT
Committed Time. The time interval used for measuring average
information transfer rates.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for dynamically
assigning IP addresses from a pre-defined list to nodes on a
network. Using DHCP to manage IP addresses simplifies client
configuration and efficiently utilizes IP addresses.
DL
Down Link
DRAP
Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol
DSCP
Differentiated Service Code Point, AKA DiffServ: An alternate use
for the ToS byte in IP packets. Six bits of this byte are being
reallocated for use as the DSCP field where each DSCP specifies a
particular per-hop behavior that is applied to the packet.
EMC
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility. The capability of equipment or
systems to be used in their intended environment within
designed efficiency levels without causing or receiving
degradation due to unintentional EMI (Electro Magnetic
Interference). EMC generally encompasses all of the
electromagnetic disciplines.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute. A non-profit
organization producing voluntary telecommunications standards
used throughout Europe, some of which have been adopted by
the EC as the technical base for Directives or Regulations.
FCC
Federal Communications Commission. A U.S. government agency
that supervises, licenses, and controls electronic and
electromagnetic transmission standards.
BreezeMAX System Manual
III
Glossary
FDD
Frequency Division Duplex. Full duplex operation by using a pair
of frequencies, one for transmission and one for reception.
FEC
Forward Error Correction. A method of communicating data that
can corrects errors in transmission on the receiving end. Prior to
transmission, the data is put through a predetermined algorithm
that adds extra bits specifically for error correction to any
character or code block. If the transmission is received in error,
the correction bits are used to check and repair the data.
FFT
Fast Fourier Transform. An algorithm for converting data from
the time domain to the frequency domain; often used in signal
processing.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. A protocol for exchanging files over the
Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to enable data
transfer.
G.711
A 64 Kbps PCM voice-coding technique. Described in the ITU-T
standard in its G-series recommendations.
G.723.1
A compression technique that can be used for compressing
speech or audio signal components at a very low bit rate as part
of the H.324 family of standards. This codec has two bit rates
associated with it: 5.3 and 6.3 Kbps. The higher bit rate provides
a somewhat higher quality of sound. The lower bit rate provides
system designers with additional flexibility. Described in the ITUT standard in its G-series recommendations.
G.729
A compression technique where voice is coded into 8 Kbps
streams. There are two variations of this standard (G.729 and
G.729 Annex A) that differ mainly in computational complexity;
both provide speech quality similar to 32-kbps ADPCM.
Described in the ITU-T standard in its G-series
recommendations.
GPS
Global Positioning System. A system that uses satellites,
receivers and software to allow users to determine their precise
geographic position.
H.323
A protocol suite defined by ITU-T for voice transmission over
internet (Voice over IP or VoIP). In addition to voice applications,
H.323 provides mechanisms for video communication and data
collaboration, in combination with the ITU-T T.120 series
standards.
IB
In-Band
IDU
Indoor Unit
BreezeMAX System Manual
IV
Glossary
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE
(pronounced I-triple-E) is an organization composed of engineers,
scientists, and students. The IEEE is best known for developing
standards for the computer and electronics industry. In
particular, the IEEE 802 standards for local-area networks are
widely followed.
IEEE 802.1p
A QoS method - A three-bit value that can be placed inside an
802.1Q frame tag.
IEEE 802.16
Also known as WIMAX. A group of broadband wireless
communications standards for metropolitan area networks
(MANs) developed by a working group of the IEEE.
IEEE 802.16a
An extension of IEEE 802.16. 802.16a operates in the 2-11GHz
frequency band over a theoretical maximum range of 31 miles
with a theoretical maximum data transfer rate of 70Mbps.
IEEE 802.1Q
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines the operation of VLAN Bridges
that permit the definition, operation and administration of
Virtual LAN topologies within a Bridged LAN infrastructure. The
802.1Q specification establishes a standard method for inserting
VLAN membership information into Ethernet frames. A tag field
containing VLAN (and/or 802.1p priority) information can be
inserted into an Ethernet frame, carrying VLAN membership
information.
IEEE 802.3
A Local Area Network protocol suite commonly known as
Ethernet. Ethernet uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access bus with
Collision Detection CSMA/CD. This method allows users to share
the network cable. However, only one station can use the cable at
a time. A variety of physical medium dependent protocols are
supported.
IEEE 802.11b
The IEEE 802.11b (also referred to as 802.11 High Rate or Wi-Fi).
An extension to 802.11 standard for wireless Ethernet networks,
that applies to wireless LANS and provides 11 Mbps transmission
(with a fallback to 5.5, 2 and 1 Mbps) in the 2.4 GHz band.
IEEE 802.11g
An extension to 802.11 standard for wireless Ethernet networks,
that applies to wireless LANs and provides 20+ Mbps in the 2.4
GHz band.
BreezeMAX System Manual
V
Glossary
IETF
Internet Engineering Task Force. One of the task forces of the
IAB (Internet Architecture Board), formally called the Internet
Activities Board, which is the technical body that oversees the
development of the Internet suite of protocols (commonly referred
to as "TCP/IP").The IETF is responsible for solving short-term
engineering needs of the Internet.
IF
Intermediate Frequency. Radio communications systems
modulate a carrier frequency with a baseband signal in order to
achieve radio transmission. In many cases, the carrier is not
modulated directly. Instead, a lower IF signal is modulated and
processed. At a later circuit stage, the IF signal is converted up to
the transmission frequency band.
IP
Internet Protocol. The standard that defines how data is
transmitted over the Internet. IP bundles data, including e-mail,
faxes, voice calls and messages, and other types, into "packets",
in order to transmit it over public and private networks.
IPsec
Security Architecture for IP Network. IP Control Protocol (IPCP)
and IPv6 Control Protocol IPsec provides security services at the
IP layer by enabling a system to select required security
protocols, determine the algorithm(s) to use for the service(s), and
put in place any cryptographic keys required to provide the
requested services. IPsec can be used to protect one or more
"paths" between a pair of hosts, between a pair of security
gateways, or between a security gateway and a host.
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunications.
An intergovernmental organization through which public and
private organizations develop telecommunications. The ITU was
founded in 1865 and became a United Nations agency in 1947. It
is responsible for adopting international treaties, regulations and
standards governing telecommunications. The standardization
functions were formerly performed by a group within the ITU
called CCITT, but after a 1992 reorganization the CCITT no
longer exists as a separate entity.
LAN
Local area Network. A computer network limited to a small
geographical area, such as a single building. The network
typically links PCs as well as shared resources such as printers.
MAC
Media Access Control. The lower of the two sub-layers of the data
link layer defined by the IEEE. The MAC sub-layer handles
access to shared media, such as whether token passing or
contention will be used.
BreezeMAX System Manual
VI
Glossary
MAC Address
Standardized data link layer address that is required for every
port or device that connects to a LAN. Other devices in the
network use these addresses to locate specific ports in the
network and to create and update routing tables and data
structures. MAC addresses are 6bytes long and are controlled by
the IEEE.
MAN
Metropolitan Area Network. A data network designed for a town
or city. In terms of geographic breadth, MANs are larger than
local-area networks (LANs), but smaller than wide-area networks
(WANs).
MIB
Management Information Base. A database of objects that can be
monitored by a network management system. SNMP uses
standardized MIB formats that allow any SNMP tools to monitor
any device defined by a MIB.
MIR
Maximum Information Rate. Specifies the maximum rate of
information that can be available to a user. The MIR is used by
the traffic policing mechanism to prevent users from sending
excess traffic to the network.
NA
Not Available or Not Applicable
NAT
Network Address Translation. Basic Network Address Translation
(Basic NAT) is a method by which IP addresses are mapped from
one group to another, transparent to end users. Network Address
Port Translation, or NAPT is a method by which many network
addresses and their TCP/UDP ports are translated into a single
network address and its TCP/UDP ports. Together, these two
operations, referred to as traditional NAT, provide a mechanism
to connect a realm with private addresses to an external realm
with globally unique registered addresses.
NIC
Network Interface Card. An expansion board you insert into a
computer (or a built-in component) that enables the computer to
connect to a network. Most NICs are designed for a particular
type of network, protocol, and media, although some can serve
multiple networks.
NIU
Network Interface Unit
NLOS
Non Line Of Sight. A term referring to wireless services which
don't require a clear open path between sites.
BreezeMAX System Manual
VII
Glossary
NMS
Network Management System. A system responsible for
managing at least part of a network. An NMS is generally a
reasonably powerful and well-equipped computer, such as an
engineering workstation. NMSs communicate with agents to help
keep track of network statistics and resources.
NOC
Network Operations Center. The physical space from which a
typically large telecommunications network is managed,
monitored and supervised.
NPU
Network Processing Unit
NRT
Non Real Time. is very similar to the Real-Time polling service
except that connections may utilize random access transmit
opportunities for sending bandwidth requests. These Non Real
Time Variable Bit Rate (NRT-VBR) services, such as file transfer
and Internet access with a minimum guaranteed rate, are
characterized by requirement for a guaranteed rate, but can
tolerate longer delays and are rather insensitive to jitter. Service
parameters include CIR, Committed Time (CT), and MIR that
limit the rate as otherwise bandwidth intensive services may
expand to occupy full bandwidth.
OA&M
Operation, Administration & Maintenance. Provides the facilities
and the personnel required to manage a network.
ODU
Outdoor Unit
OFDM
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing: A method for
multiplexing signals, which divides the available bandwidth into
a series of frequencies known as tones. Orthogonal tones do not
interfere with each other when the peak of one tone corresponds
with the null. The rapid switching, frequency-hopping technique
is intended to allow more robust data service.
OOB
Out-Of-Band
PER
Packet Error Rate. In a digital transmission, PER is the
percentage of packets with errors divided by the total number of
packets that have been transmitted, received or processed over a
given time period.
PHY
PHYsical Layer. The physical, or lowest, layer of the OSI Network
Model. In a wireless network, the PHY defines parameters such
as data rates, modulation method, signaling parameters,
transmitter/receiver synchronization, etc. Within an actual radio
implementation, the PHY corresponds to the radio front end and
baseband signal processing sections.
BreezeMAX System Manual
VIII
Glossary
PIU
Power Interface Unit
POTS
Plain Old Telephone System. A basic analog telephone
equipment.
PSU
Power Supply Unit
PPPoE
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet. PPPoE relies on two widely
accepted standards: PPP and Ethernet. PPPoE is a specification
for connecting the users on an Ethernet to the Internet through a
common broadband medium, such as a single DSL line, wireless
device or cable modem. All the users over the Ethernet share a
common connection, so the Ethernet principles supporting
multiple users in a LAN combines with the principles of PPP,
which apply to serial connections.
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation. A technique used in wireless
applications to double the available bandwidth by combining two
amplitude-modulated signals. The two combined signals differ in
phase by 90 degrees; this technique doubles the bandwidth by
combining the two signals at the source before transmission,
transmitting digital data at a rate of 4 bits per signal change.
QoS
Quality of Service. Measure of performance for a transmission
system that reflects its transmission quality and service
availability.
QPSK
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying. A data transfer technique used
in coaxial cable networks that sends data using modulating
signals. Four different phases represent data, with each signal’s
information determined by the signal before it. For example, if a
phase stays the same from one signal to the other, the
information has not changed.
RF
Radio frequency. An AC signal of high enough frequency to be
used for wireless communications.
RSSI
Received Signal Strength Indicator. A signal or circuit that
indicates the strength of the incoming (received) signal in a
receiver.
BreezeMAX System Manual
IX
Glossary
RT
Real Time. Real Time service is designed to meet the needs of
Real Time Variable Bit Rate (RT-VBR) like services characterized
by requirements for guaranteed rate and delay such as streaming
video or audio. These services are dynamic in nature, but offer
periodic dedicated requests opportunities to meet real-time
requirements. Because the subscriber equipment issues explicit
requests, the protocol overhead and latency is increased, but
capacity is granted only according to the real needs of the
connection. Service parameters include CIR and CT.
RTCP
RTP Control Protocol. A protocol that monitors the QoS of an RTP
connection and conveys information about the on-going session.
RTP
Real Time Protocol. An Internet protocol for transmitting realtime data such as audio and video. RTP itself does not guarantee
real-time delivery of data, but it does provide mechanisms for the
sending and receiving applications to support streaming data.
Typically, RTP runs on top of the UDP protocol, although the
specification is general enough to support other transport
protocols.
Rx
Receive
SIP
Session Initiation Protocol. An application-layer control IETF
protocol that can establish, modify, and terminate multimedia
sessions such as Internet telephony calls (VoIP). SIP can also
invite participants to already existing sessions, such as multicast
conferences. Media can be added to (and removed from) an
existing session. SIP transparently supports name mapping and
redirection services, which supports personal mobility - users
can maintain a single externally visible identifier regardless of
their network location.
SLA
Service Level Agreement. A contract between a service provider
and the end user, which stipulates and commits the service
provider to a required level of service. An SLA relates to issues
such as specified level of service, support options, enforcement or
penalty provisions for services not provided, a guaranteed level of
system performance as relates to downtime or uptime, a specified
level of customer support and what software or hardware will be
provided and for what fee.
SME
Small and Medium-sized Enterprises. SMEs are small-scale
entrepreneurial private enterprises: they are usually defined as
having less than 250 employees, but most have far fewer.
BreezeMAX System Manual
X
Glossary
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol. A network management
protocol that provides a means to monitor and control network
devices, and to manage configurations, statistics collection,
performance, and security. SNMP works by sending messages,
called protocol data units (PDUs), to different parts of a network.
SNMP-compliant devices, called agents, store data about
themselves in Management Information Bases (MIBs) and return
this data to the SNMP requesters.
SNR
Signal to Noise Ratio. The ratio of the amplitude of a desired
analog or digital data signal to the amplitude of noise in a
transmission channel at a specific point in time. SNR is typically
expressed logarithmically in decibels (dB). SNR measures the
quality of a transmission channel or a signal over a network
channel. The greater the ratio, the easier it is to identify and
subsequently isolate and eliminate the effects of noise. SNR also
is abbreviated as S/N.
SOHO
Small Office Home Office. A term that refers to the small or home
office environment and the business culture that surrounds it.
Typically it refers to an office or business with ten or fewer
computers and/or employees.
SU
Subscriber Unit
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol. Connection-oriented transport
layer protocol that provides reliable full-duplex data
transmission. TCP is the part of the TCP/IP suite of protocols
that is responsible for forming data connections between nodes
that are reliable, as opposed to IP, which is connectionless and
unreliable.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A set of
protocols developed by the U.S. Department of Defense to allow
communication between dissimilar networks and systems over
long distances. TCP/IP is the de facto standard for data
transmission over networks, including the Internet.
TDM
Time Division Multiplexing. Technique in which information from
multiple channels can be allocated bandwidth on a single link
based on pre-assigned time slots. Bandwidth is allocated to each
channel regardless of whether the station has data to transmit.
TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol. Simplified version of FTP that
allows files to be transferred from one computer to another over a
network, usually without the use of client authentication.
Tx
Transmit
BreezeMAX System Manual
XI
Glossary
µBST
Micro Base Station
U
A unit for measuring the height in rack cabinets. 1U = 1.75
inches.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. Connectionless transport layer protocol
in the TCP/IP protocol stack. UDP is a simple protocol that
exchanges datagrams without acknowledgments or guaranteed
delivery, requiring that error processing and retransmission be
handled by other protocols. UDP is defined in RFC 768.
UL
Up Link
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network. A group of devices on one or more
LANs that are configured with the same VLAN ID so that they can
communicate as if they were attached to the same wire, when in
fact they are located on a number of different LAN segments.
Used also to create separation between different user groups.
VLSI
Very Large Scale Integration. The process of placing thousands
(or hundreds of thousands) of electronic components on a single
chip.
VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol. Provides an advanced digital
communications network that bypasses the traditional public
switched telephone system and uses the Internet to transmit
voice communication. VoIP enables people to use the Internet as
the transmission medium for telephone calls by sending voice
data in packets using IP rather than by traditional circuit
switched transmissions of the PSTN.
VPL
Virtual Private Link. A virtual connection between two points on
the network, such as a base station and a service provider or
corporate network. Identified by the VPL ID, with functionality
that is similar to VLAN ID (VLAN on the backbone network).
VPN
Virtual Private Network. A private network of computers that's at
least partially connected by public lines. A good example would
be a private office LAN that allows users to log in remotely over
the Internet (an open, public system). VPNs use encryption and
secure protocols like PPTP to ensure that data transmissions are
not intercepted by unauthorized parties.
WAN
Wide Area Network. A computer network that spans a relatively
large geographical area. Wide area networks can be made up of
interconnected smaller networks spread throughout a building, a
state, or the entire globe.
BreezeMAX System Manual
XII
Glossary
WIMAX
The name commonly given to the IEEE 802.16 standard.
Specifications for fixed broadband wireless metropolitan access
networks (MANs) that use a point-to-multipoint architecture.
WIMAX supports very high bit rates in both uploading to and
downloading from a base station up to a distance of 30 miles.
BreezeMAX System Manual
XIII

advertisement

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement